U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Office of Administration and Resources Management (2304) Revised November 20,2017
EPA Facilities Manual: Volume 2
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
The photo on the previous page is of the atrium in the EPA Region 8 Office in Denver, Colorado. The atrium acts as
an informal gathering place for the EPA community, and helps reduce energy use, because it is a partially
conditioned space that acts as a thermal buffer for the building as a whole. Fabric sails reflect light down into the
atrium, shield occupants on the atrium's upper floors from the glare of direct sun and minimize solar heat gain.

-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.	GENERAL REQUIREMENTS	1-1
1.1	Overview	1-1
1.2	Safeguarding and Dissemination of Controlled Unclassified Information	1-2
1.2.1	Marking Controlled Unclassified Information	1-2
1.2.2	Authorized Recipients	1-2
1.2.3	Dissemination of CUI Building Information	1-2
1.2.4	Retaining CUI Documents	1-3
1.2.5	Destroying CUI Building Information	1-3
1.2.6	Notice of Disposal	1-3
1.2.7	Incidents	1-3
1.2.8	Subcontracts	1-4
1.3	Design Process	1-4
1.3.1	Pre-Design Process	1-4
1.3.2	Design Submittals	1-4
1.3.3	Basis of Design	1-5
1.3.4	15 Percent Submittal (Concept/Schematic Design)	1-5
1.3.5	35 Percent Submittal (Design Development)	1-6
1.3.6	60 Percent Submittal (Design Development)	1-7
1.3.7	95 Percent Submittal	1-9
1.3.8	100 Percent Submittal	1-10
1.4	Sustainable Design Requirements	1-10
1.4.1 Energy Simulation Models	1-10
1.5	Life Cycle Cost Analyses	1-11
1.5.1	Overview	1-11
1.5.2	Incorporation of Energy and Water Use Assessment Recommendations	1-11
1.5.3	Equipment Analysis Requirements	1-11
1.5.4	Energy Consumption and Renewable Energy Use Analysis Requirements for New
Construction or Major Renovations	1-11
1.6	Material and Equipment Design Based on Atmosphere/Environment	1-12
1.7	Commissioning	1-12
1.8	Construction Process	1-12
1.8.1	Construction Management	1-12
1.8.2	Construction Indoor Air Quality Management	1-13
1.8.3	Construction Waste Management	1-14
1.8.4	Project Closeout	1-15
2.	SECURITY	2-1
2.1	Process for Determining Security Requirements	2-1
2.2	Physical Access Control Systems (FSL-III and Higher)	2-2
2.3	Closed-Circuit Television Security Systems	2-2
2.4	Intrusion Detection Systems	2-3
2.5	Duress Alarms (Assistance Stations)	2-3
2.6	Supplemental Countermeasures	2-4
3.	PLANNING AND SITING	3-1
3.1 Siting Requirements	3-1
3.1.1	General Siting Considerations	3-1
3.1.2	Land Area	3-1
3.1.3	Floodplains	3-1
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines i

-------
3.1.4	Zoning and Other Land Use Controls	3-1
3.1.5	Utilities	3-2
3.1.6	Historic Preservation	3-2
3.1.7	"Smart Growth" Considerations	3-3
3.2	Pre-Development Investigations	3-3
3.2.1	Land Surveys	3-3
3.2.2	Geotechnical/Subsurface Investigation	3-4
3.2.3	Environmental Investigations	3-5
3.2.4	Stormwater Hydrology Investigation	3-5
3.2.5	Stormwater Runoff	3-6
3.2.6	Wastewater Discharges	3-7
3.2.7	Air Emissions	3-7
3.3	NEPA Screening and Assessment	3-7
3.3.1	Determining Required Level of Screening and Assessment	3-7
3.3.2	Categorical Exclusions, Environmental Assessments and Environmental Impact Statements3-8
3.4	Environmental Due Diligence Process Activities and Review	3-9
3.5	Hazardous Materials Surveys	3-9
4.	SITE DEVELOPMENT	4-1
4.1	Stormwater Management	4-1
4.2	Landscaping and Irrigation	4-1
4.2.1	General Requirements	4-1
4.2.2	Irrigation	4-1
4.3	Hard Surfaces	4-1
4.4	Traffic Control	4-2
4.5	Electric Vehicle Infrastructure	4-2
4.6	Site Utilities	4-2
4.6.1	Water Supply	4-3
4.6.2	Wells	4-4
4.6.3	Sanitary Sewer	4-4
4.6.4	Natural Gas Supply	4-5
4.6.5	Steam From District Energy Systems	4-5
4.6.6	Electrical Power	4-5
4.6.7	Telecommunications, Audio, Video and Data Transmission	4-6
4.7	Exterior Site Lighting	4-6
5.	ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING ENVELOPE REQUIREMENTS	5-1
5.1	Historic Preservation	5-1
5.1.1 Alterations in Historic Structures	5-1
5.2	Sustainability	5-1
5.3	Building Envelope	5-1
5.4	Ceilings	5-2
5.5	Acoustical Requirements	5-2
5.6	Doors	5-2
5.6.1 Laboratory Doors	5-2
5.7	Flooring	5-3
5.8	Building Support Areas	5-3
5.8.1	Loading Dock/Staging Facilities	5-3
5.8.2	Hazardous Materials/Waste Storage Facility	5-4
5.8.3	Restrooms	5-4
5.8.4	Janitor Closets/Custodial Space	5-4
ii Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
5.8.5	Equipment Spaces	5-4
5.8.6	Maintenance Shops	5-5
5.8.7	Chemical Storage Areas	5-5
5.8.8	General Storage Areas	5-5
5.8.9	Libraries	5-5
5.8.10	Records Storage Facilities and Areas	5-6
5.8.11	Bicycle Storage Facilities	5-6
5.8.12	Shower/Locker Rooms	5-6
5.8.13	Waste and Recycling Collection/Storage/Staging Areas	5-6
5.9	Laboratory Biosafety Architectural Requirements	5-6
5.10	Deconstruction and End-of-Life Structure Management	5-7
6.	STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS	6-1
6.1	Design Personnel Qualifications	6-1
6.2	Seismic Design	6-1
6.2.1 Seismic Instrumentation for Buildings	6-1
6.3	Floor Loading	6-1
6.4	Records Storage Facilities and Areas	6-2
7.	MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS	7-1
7.1	Mechanical Systems Design Criteria	7-1
7.1.1	Energy Efficiency	7-1
7.1.2	Computational Fluid Dynamics Modeling	7-2
7.1.3	Wind/Air Flow Modeling	7-2
7.1.4	Outdoor Design Conditions	7-2
7.1.5	Indoor Temperature and Humidity Requirements	7-2
7.1.6	Balancing Devices	7-2
7.1.7	Service Access and Clearances	7-2
7.1.8	Mechanical Rooms	7-3
7.1.9	Refrigerants	7-3
7.1.10	Insulation	7-3
7.1.11	Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories	7-3
7.1.12	Records Storage Facilities and Areas	7-4
7.2	Ventilation Systems	7-4
7.2.1	Duct Design	7-4
7.2.2	Air Handling Units	7-5
7.2.3	Fans	7-5
7.2.4	Under-Floor Air Distribution Systems	7-6
7.2.5	Exhaust Air Energy Recovery	7-6
7.2.6	Fire and Smoke Dampers	7-6
7.2.7	Demand-Controlled Ventilation and Carbon Dioxide Monitoring Equipment	7-6
7.2.8	Exhaust and Pressurization for Areas With Battery Storage, Hazardous Gases or Chemicals 7-7
7.2.9	Laboratory Ventilation Systems	7-7
7.2.10	Laboratory Fume Hoods	7-9
7.3	Indoor Air Quality Requirements	7-13
7.3.1	Ventilation Rates	7-13
7.3.2	Air Filtration Systems	7-13
7.3.3	Location of Air Intake(s)	7-13
7.4	Heating Systems	7-14
7.4.1	Energy Efficiency	7-14
7.4.2	Hot Water Distribution	7-14
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines iii

-------
7.4.3	Boilers	7-14
7.4.4	Ground Source (Geo-Exchange) Heat Pumps	7-16
7.5	Cooling Systems	7-16
7.5.1	Life Cycle Cost Analysis	7-16
7.5.2	Energy and Water Efficiency	7-16
7.5.3	Chilled Water Distribution Piping	7-16
7.5.4	Chillers	7-16
7.5.5	Vapor Compression Chillers	7-17
7.5.6	Absorption Chillers	7-18
7.5.7	Condensers	7-18
7.5.8	Cooling Towers	7-18
7.5.9	Data Center Cooling	7-20
7.5.10	Process Cooling	7-20
7.6	Other Systems	7-21
7.6.1 Refrigeration/Cold Storage	7-21
7.7	Plumbing and Piping	7-22
7.7.1	Water Supply Systems	7-22
7.7.2	Service Hot Water	7-24
7.7.3	Water Fixtures and Fittings	7-25
7.7.4	Stormwater Drainage System	7-26
7.7.5	Sanitary Wastewater System	7-28
7.7.6	Process Wastewater System	7-29
7.7.7	Natural Gas Supply	7-29
7.7.8	Fuel Oil Storage and Supply	7-30
7.7.9	Laboratory Gas Storage and Distribution Systems	7-30
7.7.10	Emergency Eyewash Units and Safety Showers	7-33
7.8	Energy and Water Metering	7-34
7.8.1	General Requirements for Advanced Metering	7-34
7.8.2	Energy Meters	7-34
7.8.3	Water Meters	7-36
7.8.4	Other Fuel Meters	7-36
7.8.5	Sub-metering	7-36
7.9	Other Measuring and Monitoring	7-36
7.9.1	Flow Meters for Air in Ducts	7-36
7.9.2	Temperature and Pressure Sensors	7-37
7.9.3	Air Stack Monitoring	7-37
7.9.4	Process Wastewater	7-37
7.10	Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Mechanical Systems	7-37
8. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS	8-1
8.1	General Requirements	8-1
8.1.1	Design Calculations	8-1
8.1.2	Electrical Studies and Testing	8-1
8.1.3	Electrical Installations	8-2
8.1.4	Demand-Side Management Systems	8-2
8.1.5	Coordination of Work	8-2
8.1.6	Power Factors	8-2
8.2	Service Capacity	8-2
8.3	Interior Electrical Systems	8-2
8.3.1	Basic Materials and Methods	8-2
8.3.2	Laboratory Power Requirements	8-3
iv Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
8.3.3 Records Storage Facilities and Areas	8-3
8.4	Lightning Protection	8-3
8.4.1	Scope of Design	8-3
8.4.2	Master Label	8-3
8.5	Cathodic (Anti-Corrosion) Protection	8-3
8.6	Lighting Systems	8-4
8.7	Secondary Power Systems	8-4
8.7.1	Legally Required/Life Safety Emergency Power	8-6
8.7.2	Legally Required Standby Power	8-6
8.7.3	Facility Necessary Backup Power	8-7
8.7.4	Uninterruptible Power Supplies	8-8
8.8	Telecommunications Systems and Spaces	8-8
8.8.1	General Requirements	8-8
8.8.2	Local Area Network/Telecommunications Rooms	8-8
8.8.3	Computer Center	8-9
8.8.4	Sound Masking	8-10
9.	BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS	9-1
9.1	Direct Digital Control Network	9-1
9.1.1	Control Computer Hardware Requirements	9-5
9.1.2	Building Automation System Controllers	9-5
9.1.3	Building Automation System Software	9-5
9.1.4	Wireless Sensor Technology	9-6
9.1.5	Design Considerations	9-7
9.1.6	Point Naming Conventions	9-7
9.1.7	Laboratories	9-7
9.2	Automatic Controls	9-8
9.2.1	Temperature Controls	9-8
9.2.2	Humidity Controls	9-8
9.2.3	Ventilation Controls	9-9
9.2.4	Fire and Smoke Detection and Protection Controls	9-9
9.2.5	Cooling Tower and Water-Cooled Condenser System Controls	9-10
9.2.6	Simultaneous Heating and Cooling	9-10
9.2.7	Set Point Reset Controls	9-10
9.3	Energy Management and Conservation	9-11
9.4	Building Alarm System	9-12
9.5	Maintenance Scheduling	9-12
10.	FIRE PROTECTION	10-1
10.1	Emergency Vehicle Access and Fire Lanes	10-1
10.2	Main Firefighting Water Supply	10-2
10.2.1	Fire Hydrants	10-2
10.2.2	Fire Department Hose Streams	10-3
10.3	Types of Construction	10-3
10.3.1	Ceilings	10-3
10.3.2	Mixed Occupancies	10-3
10.4	Classification of Occupancies	10-4
10.5	Egress	10-4
10.5.1	Lighted Exit Signs	10-5
10.5.2	Photoluminescent Materials	10-5
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines v

-------
10.6	Coatings and Interior Finishes	10-5
10.6.1	Intumescent Coatings	10-5
10.6.2	Combustible Substances	10-6
10.7	Fire Life Safety Requirements for Specific Room Types	10-6
10.7.1	Telecommunications Rooms	10-6
10.7.2	Information Technology Equipment Rooms	10-6
10.7.3	Records Storage Facilities and Areas	10-7
10.7.4	Storage Cabinets for Flammable and Combustible Liquids	10-7
10.7.5	Storage Tanks for Compressed Gases and Cryogenic Liquids	10-7
10.8	Automatic Fire Suppression	10-7
10.8.1	Automatic Sprinkler Protection	10-7
10.8.2	Water Supply Testing	10-8
10.8.3	Size and Zoning	10-8
10.8.4	Dry Pipe	10-8
10.8.5	Quick Response	10-9
10.9	Fire Alarm Systems	10-9
10.9.1	Automatic Systems Input	10-9
10.9.2	Automatic Systems Output	10-10
10.9.3	System Features	10-10
10.9.4	Reliability	10-11
10.9.5	Central Station Service	10-11
10.9.6	Fire Zones	10-11
10.9.7	Wire Class and Circuit Survivability	10-11
10.9.8	Emergency Power	10-11
10.9.9	Carbon Monoxide Detectors	10-11
10.9.10	Fire Command Center	10-11
10.10	Portable Fire Extinguishers	10-12
10.11	Gaseous Fire Suppression Systems	10-12
10.11.1	Halon-1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems	10-12
10.11.2	Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishing Systems	10-12
10.12	Kitchen Exhaust Hoods	10-12
10.13	Operations and Maintenance Documents	10-12
11. SPECIALTIES	11-1
11.1	Furnishings	11-1
11.2	Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory	11-1
11.2.1	Door Identification	11-1
11.2.2	Room Numbering	11-1
11.2.3	Building Directory	11-1
11.3	Laboratory Casework	11-1
11.3.1	Shelving	11-2
11.3.2	Vented Storage Cabinets	11-2
11.3.3	Countertops	11-2
APPENDIX A: RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS	A-l
A.l Required Regulations, Codes, Standards and References	A-l
A.2 Additional Guidance	A-3
vi Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
1. General Requirements
1.1 Overview
The EPA Facilities Manual is composed of four distinct, yet complementary, resources for planning and managing
EPA facilities. These four volumes are meant to be used simultaneously to determine design intent, requirements
and the ongoing evaluation of all EPA facilities.
•	Volume 1: The Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines contain information on space planning, space
estimation, environment, materials, furniture, process and maintenance. The EPA Office of Administration
and Resources Management developed this document to help EPA facility managers, space managers,
and line personnel plan and use their space.
•	Volume 2: Architecture and Engineering Guidelines (referred to hereafter as the A&E Guidelines) provide
guidance for facilities management, engineering, planning and architecture professionals in the design
and construction of new EPA facilities and major and minor alterations in existing facilities.
•	Volume 3: The Safety and Health Manual: Safety and Health Requirements (referred to hereafter as the
EPA Safety Manual) outline safety and health considerations for owned or leased EPA facilities. The Safety
Manual's goal is to maintain a safe and healthful workplace that protects against injury, illness and loss of
life.
•	Volume 4: The Safety, Health and Environmental Management Manual: Environmental Management
Guidelines (referred to hereafter as the EPA Environmental Management Manual), establish
environmental specifications to be addressed by designers and managers of EPA facilities and related
building systems.
The primary purpose of these A&E Guidelines is to establish a consistent, agencywide level of quality and
excellence in the planning, design and construction of all EPA facilities-related projects. These A&E Guidelines are
also intended to be used as resources for developing construction documents for public bidding and/or the award
of construction contracts to meet relevant building code and EPA facilities requirements. They are not intended to
deter use of more stringent or greater performance criteria. Architects, engineers, contractors and other
professionals supporting EPA facility projects shall determine any additional requirements not covered in these
A&E Guidelines for their projects. It is the responsibility of these professionals to verify which requirements must
be attained for a project and to develop a strategy for achieving the relevant requirements.
For the purposes of this document, the following entities are defined as follows:
•	EPA Project Manager: For projects at EPA-owned buildings, the EPA Project Manager is the Contracting
Officer's Representative. For projects at General Services Administration (GSA)-owned or GSA-leased
buildings, the EPA Project Manager is the designated EPA point-of-contact for the project. The EPA Project
Manager is responsible for managing the project and has the authority to delegate responsibilities to
qualified individuals.
•	Project Architect/Engineer (A/E): The Project A/E refers to the architecture/engineering firm and any
subcontractors hired by that firm who are contractually responsible for the design of the project and for
production of construction contract documents.
•	Construction Contractor: The Construction Contractor is the general contracting firm and any
subcontractors hired by that firm who are contractually responsible for the construction of the project.
Adherence to the A&E Guidelines does not relieve the Project A/E and Construction Contractor of any of their
responsibilities as professionals. The Project A/E personnel involved in the design of an EPA-owned and/or
operated laboratory, office, storage or other facility shall be licensed professionals in their fields of expertise and
shall be experienced in the design of such facilities. They will be required to ensure that all portions of the project
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-1

-------
comply with all established applicable regulations, codes, standards, references and guidance, as well as the
provisions of these A&E Guidelines. Appendix A of these A&E Guidelines includes a list of required regulations,
codes, standards, references and guidance. Appendix A is not all-inclusive, however, and omission from this list
does not release the Project A/E or Construction Contractor from meeting established applicable regulations,
codes, standards, references and guidance.
Citations of regulations, codes, standards, references or guidance within these A&E Guidelines shall be assumed to
refer to the most recent edition at the time of contract award. Any publication dates specifically stated in the A&E
Guidelines reflect the version in use when the A&E Guidelines were written and published. When using these A&E
Guidelines, the user shall verify that the documents referenced are the most recent and have not been
superseded. In cases of conflict between codes, standards or other requirements, the most stringent, technically
appropriate criteria shall apply. Where it is unclear which set of requirements is applicable, consult the EPA Project
Manager for direction.
1.2 Safeguarding and Dissemination of Controlled Unclassified Information
1.2.1	Marking Controlled Unclassified Information
Documents that contain building information must be reviewed by the EPA to identify any Controlled Unclassified
Information (CUI), before the original or any copies are disseminated to any other parties. If CUI is identified, the
EPA Project Manager may direct contractors to imprint or affix CUI document markings to the original documents
and all copies before dissemination.
1.2.2	Authorized Recipients
Building information considered CUI must be protected with access strictly controlled and limited to those
individuals having a need to know such information. Those with a need to know may include federal, state, and
local government entities and nongovernment entities engaged in the conduct of business on behalf of or with the
EPA. Nongovernment entities may include architects, engineers, consultants, contractors, subcontractors and
others submitting an offer or bid to the EPA or performing work under an EPA contract or subcontract. Contractors
must provide CUI building information when needed for the performance of official federal, state and local
government functions, such as for code compliance reviews and for the issuance of building permits. Public safety
entities such as fire and utility departments may require access to CUI building information on a need-to-know
basis. This paragraph must not prevent or encumber the dissemination of CUI building information to public safety
entities.
1.2.3	Dissemination of CUI Building Information
By Electronic Transmission
Electronic transmission of CUI outside of the EPA firewall and network must use session (or alternatively file
encryption). Sessions (or files) must be encrypted with an approved National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST) algorithm, such as Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) or Triple Data Encryption Standard (3DES), in
accordance with Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS) 140-2, Security Requirements for
Cryptographic Modules. Encryption tools that meet FIPS 140-2 are referenced on the NIST website:
http://csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/documents/140-l/1401vend.htm. All encryption products used to satisfy
the FIPS 140-2 requirement should have a validation certificate that can be verified at
http://csrc.nist.gOv/groups/STM/cmvp/validation.html#02. (Not all vendors of security products that claim
conformance with FIPS 140-2 have validation certificates.) Contractors must provide CUI building information only
to authorized representatives of state, federal, and local government entities and firms currently registered as
"active" in the System for Award Management (SAM) database at https://www.acquisition.gov that have a need to
know such information. If a subcontractor is not registered in SAM and has a need to possess CUI building
information, the subcontractor shall provide to the contractor its Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS)
number or its tax identification number and a copy of its business license.
1-2 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
By Non-Electronic Form or on Portable Electronic Data Storage Devices
Portable electronic data storage devices include but are not limited to CDs, DVDs and USB drives. Non-electronic
forms of CUI building information include paper documents.
•	By Mail: Utilize only methods of shipping that provide services for monitoring receipt of delivery, such as
track and confirm, proof of delivery, signature confirmation or return receipt.
•	In Person: Contractors must provide CUI building information only to authorized representatives of state,
federal, and local government entities and firms currently registered as "active" in the SAM database that
have a need to know such information.
Record Keeping
Contractors must maintain a list of the state, federal, and local government entities and the firms to which CUI is
disseminated. This list must include, at a minimum, all of the following information:
•	The name of the state, federal, or local government entity or firm to which CUI has been disseminated.
•	The name of the individual at the entity or firm that is responsible for protecting the CUI building
information, with access strictly controlled and limited to those individuals having a need to know such
information.
•	Contact information for the named individual.
•	A description of the CUI building information provided.
Once work is completed, the contractor must collect all lists maintained in accordance with this paragraph,
including those maintained by any subcontractors, and submit them to the EPA Project Manager.
1.2.4	Retaining CUI Documents
CUI building information (both electronic and paper formats) must be protected, with access strictly controlled and
limited to those individuals having a need to know such information.
1.2.5	Destroying CUI Building Information
When no longer needed, CUI building information must be destroyed such that the marked information is
rendered unreadable and incapable of being restored, or returned to the EPA Project Manager, in accordance with
NIST Special Publication 800-88, Guidelines for Media Sanitization. If CUI building information is not returned to
the EPA Project Manager, examples of acceptable destruction methods for CUI building information include
burning or shredding hard copy; physically destroying portable electronic storage devices such as CDs, DVDs and
USB drives; deleting and removing files from electronic recycling bins; and removing material from computer hard
drives using a permanent-erase utility such as bit-wiping software or disk crushers.
1.2.6	Notice of Disposal
The contractor must notify the EPA Project Manager that all CUI building information has been destroyed or
returned to the EPA Project Manager by the contractor and its subcontractors in accordance with Section 1.2.5
above, with the exception of the contractor's record copy. This notice must be submitted to the EPA Project
Manager at the completion of the contract in order to receive final payment.
1.2.7	Incidents
All improper disclosures of CUI building information must be reported immediately to the EPA Project Manager. If
the contract provides for progress payments, the EPA Project Manager may withhold approval of progress
payments until the contractor provides a corrective action plan explaining how the contractor will prevent future
improper disclosures of CUI building information. Progress payments may also be withheld for failure to comply
with any provision in this Section 1.2 until the contractor provides a corrective action plan explaining how the
contractor will rectify any noncompliance and comply with this Section 1.2 in the future.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-3

-------
1.2.8 Subcontracts
The contractor must insert the substance of this Section 1.2 in all subcontracts.
1.3 Design Process
The EPA is a strong proponent of integrated design. Integrated design requires that all stakeholders evaluate
project objectives and building materials, systems and assemblies from many different perspectives in order to
leverage interdependencies. By achieving synergies among disciplines and among technologies, the EPA can
produce more efficient and cost-effective buildings that better comply with environmental and safety
requirements and promote worker productivity and satisfaction.
1.3.1	Pre-Design Process
The pre-design process for EPA facilities, including space acquisition and planning requirements, is generally
discussed in Volume 1, Space Planning and Acquisition Guidelines. The pre-design process will generate various
planning documents, studies, evaluations and reports. The results and conclusions of these documents shall be
properly addressed and incorporated into the facility design and construction phases of the project. The following
areas will be defined during the facility planning phase of the project and will be included, as applicable, in the pre-
design package by the EPA to the Project A/E:
•	A brief overview and description of all existing facilities, and of the campus if the facilities are so
composed.
•	An overview of each component of the facility or campus.
•	A brief introductory description of the organization of the various branches and laboratories in the project
and how they interrelate, and a more detailed description of each branch and laboratory.
•	A brief overview of the scope of the specific project requirements.
•	A brief description of the facility concept (i.e., number of floors, floor areas, number of
laboratories/special spaces, offices, location of site, acreage and other characteristics).
•	A general description of the various facility spaces and area requirements to be utilized during the design
of the facility and also the pertinent area requirements for the exterior areas of the project.
•	Quantitative and qualitative requirements of the specific program and space identification and sizes.
•	Room data sheets for all facility spaces, developed in accordance with the requirements of Volume 1,
Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines.
The Project A/E will be responsible for ensuring that the facility final design conforms to the specifications outlined
in the planning phase documents and these A&E Guidelines.
The EPA Project Manager is required to complete a GreenCheck for each qualifying project. The GreenCheck
provides a current list of the sustainability requirements that a project must achieve.
1.3.2	Design Submittals
The Project A/E shall submit required construction drawings, specifications, cost estimates and design
analyses/calculations to the EPA Project Manager at interim stages of development. Typically, submittals are
required at the 15, 35, 60, 95 and 100 percent stage; however, not all projects will require submission at each of
the stages. The EPA does, however, reserve the right to require specific submittals from stages not specifically
required (e.g., Code Analysis, Life Safety Plan). Submittals, including specifications and design drawing notations,
must follow Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) MasterFormat.
Following each design phase, the EPA will go through a review process and provide comments to the Project A/E,
as appropriate. As needed, the Project A/E may request a meeting to clarify any comments or resolve any conflicts.
1-4 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
The Project A/E must ensure all comments are satisfactorily addressed or resolved and are incorporated in the
next phase of design.
The EPA will separately contract for a Commissioning Authority at the time a design contract is awarded. The
selected Commissioning Authority will be involved in all design reviews beginning at the 15 percent submittal. The
EPA's commissioning process is documented in the EPA Building Commissioning Guidelines.
1.3.3	Basis of Design
Within 30 days following the initial design charrette, the Project A/E shall submit a Basis of Design (BOD) document
that addresses all requirements presented in the Program of Requirements (POR) and/or discussed during the
design charrette.
1.3.4	15 Percent Submittal (Concept/Schematic Design)
This schematic submittal stage is required on complex projects and/or where architectural design elements require
coordination with interior design development or development of exterior design considerations. The 15 percent
submittal ensures that the Project A/E demonstrates an understanding of the scope of the project and will adhere
to project criteria, formats and conventions. At this stage, the Project A/E will submit, for example:
•	Updated BOD.
•	Code analysis, identifying all applicable codes and key criteria that will affect the design.
•	Vicinity plan showing existing and new topography and utilities, access roads, extent of parking and site
circulation, and relationships to other buildings.
•	Photographs of the site and surroundings.
•	Preliminary massing studies (Building Information Modeling [BIM] Level of Development 100 equivalent).
•	Exterior elevations showing fenestration and exterior building materials.
•	Single-line floor plans showing all walls, openings, rooms and built-in features.
•	Building sections and typical wall sections showing floor-to-floor heights.
•	Facility organization plans and/or sections, showing main circulation paths and the locations of shared
and specialized spaces.
•	Space tabulation by room indicating net square footage, architectural treatments and utilities.
•	Sustainability design plan, detailing the approach to meeting the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal
Buildings and any other federal, state, or local sustainable building requirements, including laws and
executive orders. Also, where required, include a strategy for achieving relevant LEED certifications.
•	Climate and microclimate data from the National Weather Service or local weather service, and seasonal
solar orientation data.
•	Energy model baseline simulations and preliminary calculations showing the design will meet the energy
performance levels required by the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings, Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) Title 10 Part 433, and any other federal, state, or local mandates.
•	Power usage effectiveness (PUE™) model calculations for the new construction of data centers. PUE
modeling and measurement calculations shall be performed as defined by the Green Gridฎ white paper,
"PUE: A Comprehensive Examination of the Metric."
•	Life cycle cost analyses (LCCAs) for the following technologies/alternatives to identify the systems and
designs that are life cycle cost-effective:
- Renewable electric energy and alternative energy technologies.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-5

-------
-	Solar hot water heating (as required by the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 [EISA]).
-	Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) design and equipment alternatives to determine the
optimum HVAC system design.
-	For new data centers, data center design alternatives to determine the lowest PUE that is life cycle
cost-effective.
•	Preliminary daylighting analysis (for new construction and major renovation projects only).
•	A climate risk analysis, which identifies applicable climate-induced risks, evaluates the severity of these
risks to the facility and operations, and specifies design elements to mitigate these potential impacts.
•	GreenCheck submittal titled "Project name - 15 percent design stage."
•	Order of magnitude cost estimate based on UniFormat reflecting the cost of the intended project and the
cost of alternate schemes/solutions presented, including the cost for providing expansion contingency.
1.3.5 35 Percent Submittal (Design Development)
The 35 percent submittal includes design development documents and supporting design calculations to clearly
show the adequacy of project design and functional arrangements. This submittal includes, for example:
•	Updated BOD.
•	Full code analysis, identifying all applicable codes and key criteria that will affect the design, including
building classifications, occupancy, occupancy count, life safety plans for fire ratings/separations and
egress, plumbing fixture requirements, material requirements, etc.
•	Site development plans delineating all buildings in the area, proposed parking locations, roads, sidewalks,
curbing, fencing, landscaping, stormwater management system, and routing of water, sewer, gas, and
other utilities.
•	Security plan describing the methods, procedures and measures that will be used to maintain site
security.
•	Preliminary site stormwater calculations determining the rainfall intensity (in inches) and runoff
associated with the 95th percentile storm, consistent with the EPA Technical Guidance on Implementing
the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the Energy Independence
and Security Act. The site drawings and calculations shall show how low impact development stormwater
management strategies are managing the rainfall onsite and preventing the offsite discharge of
precipitation from all rainfall events less than or equal to the 95th percentile rainfall event.
-	In addition, runoff quantities that exceed the 95th percentile storm shall be provided where required
by local flood control ordinances and codes (and in conformance with those ordinances/codes).
•	Further developed massing in context with adjacent site, topography and buildings.
•	Architectural plans showing complete functional layout, room designations, critical dimensions, all
columns and built-in equipment for each building section.
•	Reflected ceiling plans.
•	Preliminary furniture layouts for conference rooms, libraries and similar spaces.
•	Updated energy model with updated energy use calculations, input parameters and output data.
•	Updated daylighting calculations.
•	Updated analysis of Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings and LEED (where required)
certification potential, with accompanying checklist.
1-6 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	Life safety plans showing fire subdivisions, fire separation ratings throughout the building, occupant load
calculations and exit capacity calculations.
•	Water supply analysis, evaluating the available water supply for fire department use and calculating the
anticipated demand of a facility to establish the minimum water supply required (provide appropriate
supporting calculations and proposed design options and/or alternatives for consideration).
•	Preliminary riser diagram for communication and fire alarm systems.
•	Plumbing plans showing proposed fixture locations and basic riser diagrams.
•	Mechanical plans delineating proposed layout of systems, locations and preliminary arrangements of all
major items of mechanical equipment.
•	Basic outline of control system requirements (e.g., materials, methods, sequence of operation).
Preliminary one-line or ladder diagrams for the HVAC system and HVAC control system will be submitted
as part of the electrical package. (See electrical plans bullet below.)
•	Electrical plans showing proposed electrical service and distribution array (preliminary one-line or ladder
diagrams), lighting fixture patterns and receptacle locations.
•	Preliminary one-line diagram of proposed metering network that includes the location of meters and their
connection to remote terminal units (if necessary for communicating with the EPA's enterprise-level
advanced metering software system) and building automation system (BAS).
•	List of applicable specifications for all materials, types of work, and architectural, structural, and
mechanical systems.
•	GreenCheck submittal titled "Project name - 35 percent design stage."
•	Itemized cost estimates identifying all intended work, based on UniFormat.
1.3.6 60 Percent Submittal (Design Development)
The 60 percent submittal includes contract documents and supporting materials that clearly show the
development of the project at the 60 percent stage. The objective is to provide the EPA with sufficient drawings,
cost estimates and specifications to evaluate the Project A/E's adherence to detail and systems criteria, to review
coordination between disciplines, and to ensure that comments made during previous reviews were understood
and incorporated. The 60 percent submittal shall include, for example:
•	Updated BOD.
•	Completed title sheet, drawing index and legend sheets.
•	Updated code analysis, identifying all applicable codes and key criteria that will affect the design.
•	Detailed site and utility plans.
•	Landscaping plans, clearly illustrating compliance with species selection and water use reduction
requirements.
•	Developed roof plan and exterior elevations, building sections and wall sections.
•	Detailed building floor plans with all walls, partitions, dimensions, door and window schedules and details,
plumbing fixtures, and fixed equipment or items (e.g., fume hoods, sinks, cabinets).
•	Composite floor plans (when applicable) showing construction phasing.
•	Revised reflected ceiling plan.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-7

-------
•	Developed schedule of finishes, clearly indicating environmental attributes of each material (e.g., volatile
organic compound levels, recycled content).
•	Updated Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings and LEED (where required) checklists,
including preliminary calculations for points sought.
•	Updated energy model with updated energy use calculations, input parameters and output data.
•	Updated daylighting calculations if design changes have affected the results.
•	Completed fire protection/life safety plans, including fire sprinkler/standpipe calculations, fire alarm
drawings and a detailed description of the fire alarm system. Detailed calculations and description of any
fire suppression or smoke control/exhaust system and its controls shall also be provided, including
activation, interlocks with the HVAC system, and connection to detection and alarm systems.
-	Sprinkler demand analysis: For design-bid-build projects, provide proposed system layout with
hydraulic sprinkler calculations, as required in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13 or other
applicable criteria, of the expected demand area(s) to reflect the system demand (calculations that
approximate the demand and pressure requirements are not acceptable); only include proposed
piping layout in the project development stage (60 percent drawings) as part of the submitted
calculations.
•	All design listings, reference numbers and exact construction details for fire-rated assemblies. The
appropriate detail must be provided on the architectural plans for all fire-rated assemblies and systems
used in the construction of the building, including the descriptive listings of all products used in the
assemblies and systems.
•	Detailed hazardous material inventory statement including, but not limited to, product name, Chemical
Abstracts Service (CAS) number, classification, storage location, storage method, NFPA 704 ratings and
the supporting Safety Data Sheets.
•	Detailed description of the plumbing systems, including calculations for the sizing of the following:
domestic hot and cold water, waste and vent, natural and liquefied petroleum gases, vacuum,
compressed air, distilled and deionized water, medical gases, and other specialty systems. Clearly
illustrate plumbing fixture compliance with WaterSense,ฎ ENERGY STARฎ and Federal Energy
Management Program (FEMP) product specification requirements. Also, illustrate compliance with the
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 189.1
Sections 6.3.2 (Building Water Use Reduction-Mandatory Provisions), 6.4.2 (Building Water Use
Reduction-Prescriptive Option) and 6.4.3 (Special Water Features-Prescriptive Option).
•	Detailed description of mechanical system design, including equipment and refrigerants. Clearly illustrate
equipment compliance with ENERGY STAR and FEMP product specification requirements.
•	Detailed calculations of heating and cooling loads, piping, ductwork, and equipment sizing associated with
the HVAC system, including calculations illustrating compliance with ASHRAE Standard 55, Thermal
Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy, and ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Ventilation for Acceptable
Indoor Air Quality.
•	Detailed outline of control system requirements (e.g., materials, methods, sequence of operation, sensors
[type, accuracy, precision], and control valves).
-	This section shall also include a description of, and vendor specifications for, the BAS. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Building Automation Systems, within these A&E Guidelines for detailed requirements of
the BAS.)
1-8 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
- The control system descriptions must also discuss air inflow and exhaust balancing, system response
time, and turn-down capacity of major equipment and systems, including (1) ventilation air ducts and
dampers; and (2) hydronic system piping and associated valves.
•	Basic ladder diagrams and temperature control schematics, indicating remote sensors, panel mounted
controllers and thermostats.
•	Detailed description of electrical system design, including lighting systems, wiring systems and location of
proposed use, lighting protection system, grounding, basic characteristics of panel boards (including short
circuit and voltage drop calculations), metering, electrical schedule, and fire alarm system (including
battery calculations). Clearly illustrate equipment compliance with ENERGY STAR and FEMP product
specification requirements.
•	Detailed description of the advanced metering system, including vendor specifications for building-level
and submeters.
•	Documentation of manufacturer's operations and maintenance (O&M) requirements for all specified
metering hardware.
•	Building recycling collection plan with floor plans annotating areas for collecting reusable, recyclable and
compostable materials.
•	GreenCheck submittal titled "Project name - 60 percent design stage."
•	Detailed cost estimate using quantity take-offs and unit prices, based on UniFormat.
The Project A/E shall coordinate the submission of the 60 percent submittal with the Draft Systems Commissioning
Plan developed by the EPA's Commissioning Authority for the project.
1.3.7 95 Percent Submittal
The 95 percent submittal shall include contract documents and supporting materials that can be considered
biddable documents by the EPA. This submittal includes, for example:
•	Updated BOD.
•	Updated code analysis, identifying all applicable codes and key criteria that will affect the design.
•	Contract drawings and specifications that are 100 percent complete for all disciplines (i.e., architectural,
structural, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, fire alarm).
•	List of proprietary items, long lead-time items, and/or items that because of their uniqueness, rareness,
and/or critical tolerance in manufacture and/or installation require scrutiny during construction.
•	Final stormwater calculations.
•	Final architectural finish boards, showing samples of proposed finishes.
•	Final calculations for all systems and equipment, including engineering calculations.
•	Final energy control system drawings, including the drawing index, control system legend, valve schedule,
damper schedule, control system schematic and equipment schedule, sequence of operation and data
terminal strip layout, control loop wiring diagrams, motor starter and relay wiring diagram,
communication network and block diagram, and direct digital control (DDC) panel installation and block
diagram.
•	Final energy model with energy use calculations, input parameters and output data.
•	Final daylighting calculations.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-9

-------
•	Updated Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings and LEED (where required) checklists,
including calculations for points sought.
•	GreenCheck submittal titled "Project name - 95 percent design stage."
•	Detailed cost estimate, using quantity take-offs, unit prices and labor costs, based on UniFormat.
1.3.8 100 Percent Submittal
This submittal shall provide all final drawings, specifications and cost estimates ready for contract award. With this
submittal, the Project A/E shall also include an estimate of the time necessary to complete the project in calendar
days and shall include manufacturers' catalog cuts, engineering supporting documents (including calculations) and
published data of major items specified and used as the basis of the design. The Project A/E shall provide a
detailed submittal log to be utilized during construction management.
This submittal shall also include updated documentation of compliance with the Guiding Principles for Sustainable
Federal Buildings and any other federal, state or local sustainable building requirements.
For projects pursuing LEED certification, within 30 days of completion of the 100 percent construction documents,
the Project A/E shall submit LEED design phase prerequisites and credits to the appropriate certification body for
review. The Project A/E shall respond to requests from the certification body for additional clarifications and/or
documentation in order to achieve design phase prerequisites and credits.
1.4 Sustainable Design Requirements
For the design, construction and renovation of EPA facilities, the Project A/E must meet the Guiding Principles for
Sustainable Federal Buildings and any other federal, state or local sustainable building requirements.
1.4.1 Energy Simulation Models
Hourly energy simulation models are essential to evaluating designs for new buildings and major renovations of
existing buildings. All energy consumption and savings modeling performed shall meet the following general
requirements:
•	The modeler shall follow the performance-based energy budgeting methodology specified in 10 CFR 433.
•	The energy simulation software package(s) must be approved in advance by the EPA Project Manager.
•	The modeler shall submit an Energy Simulation Model and Report (ESM Report) containing tabular and
graphical summaries of the model results, summary of input parameters, list of assumptions, analysis of
results, and recommendations for the baseline (i.e., ASHRAE code-compliant) and proposed models. All
raw data and model outputs shall be provided as PDF or other suitable file formats, in an appendix to the
ESM Report. These shall include, but not be limited to:
-	Assumptions regarding local weather statistics.
-	Building usage profiles.
-	Building envelope characteristics with component information, coordinated with specifications.
-	Utility rates for all utilities that service the facility, whether locally based or distant, including
transportation charges.
-	Equipment operating characteristics (e.g., temperature ranges, pressure drops, assumed or rated
efficiencies, power consumption).
Input parameters should be organized (preferably in a table) based on each major occupancy (e.g.,
laboratories, office space) in the building(s) being modeled. Takeoffs, such as walls, roof, and window
areas, should also be tabulated in the ESM Report.
1-10 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
• Total energy consumption and savings shall be expressed in million British Thermal Units (MMBtus) and in
thousand Btus per gross, usable square foot (kBtu/GSF). Electricity, natural gas, and steam inputs or
purchases shall be converted to Btus using standard factors. (The conversion factors used shall be
documented and submitted to the EPA in the ESM Report.)
1.5 Life Cycle Cost Analyses
1.5.1	Overview
LCCAs must be completed and submitted during project design as indicated in Section 1.3, Design Process, above.
NIST Handbook 135, Life Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management Program, provides guidance to
federal agencies for using LCCA to evaluate capital investment projects to reduce future O&M costs of federal
facilities. These rules must be followed, unless specifically exempted, in evaluating the cost-effectiveness of all new
construction or major building renovation projects, potential energy and water conservation projects, and
renewable energy projects. As a companion product, NIST has also established the Building Life Cycle Cost
computer program to perform LCCAs.
For projects not related to energy or water, Office of Management and Budget Circular A-94 provides the
necessary methodology.
1.5.2	Incorporation of Energy and Water Use Assessment Recommendations
For renovations at an existing EPA facility, the Project A/E must review the energy and water efficiency measures
recommended in prior energy and water assessments and conduct LCCAs to determine which recommendations to
include in the design.
1.5.3	Equipment Analysis Requirements
Federal agencies, including the EPA, are required to ensure that any capital energy-using equipment investment
uses the most energy-efficient designs, systems, equipment and controls that are life cycle cost-effective (EISA,
Section 434). This requirement applies to projects in an existing EPA-occupied building that are not a major
renovation, but that involve replacement of existing equipment/systems (e.g., boilers, chillers) or involve the
renovation, rehabilitation, expansion or remodeling of existing space. The EPA is required to use ENERGY STAR or
FEMP-designated equipment where feasible and cost-effective, according to an LCCA (Energy Policy Act [EPAct] of
2005, Section 104).
1.5.4	Energy Consumption and Renewable Energy Use Analysis Requirements for New Construction
or Major Renovations
EPA new construction projects are required to exceed ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings, to the energy performance level required by the Guiding Principles for Sustainable
Federal Buildings, 10 CFR 433, and any other federal, state, or local mandates. Consult 10 CFR 433 for details on
required calculation methodologies for energy performance and life cycle cost-effectiveness.
For construction projects that are major renovations of existing facilities, the Project A/E must prepare energy
models and submit analyses showing the renovations will meet ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and the energy
performance level required by the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings and any other federal, state
or local mandates. If achieving the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings energy performance
requirement is not life cycle cost-effective, the Project A/E must prepare LCCAs evaluating the level of energy
reduction that is life cycle cost-effective.
For new EPA facilities or major renovations of existing facilities, the Project A/E is required to implement life cycle
cost-effective renewable energy projects on site. The Project A/E must prepare LCCAs for applicable technologies,
including solar hot water heaters to meet at least 30 percent of the project's domestic (i.e., restrooms, kitchens)
hot water demand.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-11

-------
When constructing a new data center, the EPA is required to design the data center to achieve the lowest possible
PUE that is life cycle cost-effective, and the annualized PUE shall be no higher than 1.4. PUE modeling and
measurement calculations shall be performed as defined by the Green Grid white paper, "PUE: A Comprehensive
Examination of the Metric." An LCCA must be prepared to demonstrate the lowest PUE that is life cycle cost-
effective.
1.6	Material and Equipment Design Based on Atmosphere/Environment
Careful consideration shall be given in the design to ensure all equipment and material are suitable for the
environment in which it will be installed. For example, exterior equipment and interior equipment in laboratories
and testing and storage areas may be subject to corrosive atmospheres or environments.
•	Corrosive Atmospheres (e.g., saltwater atmosphere): The NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, covers
requirements for electrical installations subject to deteriorating agents such as corrosive agents. Special
consideration shall be given to the type of raceways to be used in corrosive environments (e.g., chemical
storage areas, some laboratories, areas near air exhausts for spaces with corrosive fumes). Only hot-
dipped galvanized steel and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings are acceptable for buildings in
coastal locations. All equipment to be used in corrosive atmospheres shall be deemed suitable by the
Project A/E for the atmosphere in which they will be installed.
•	Equipment Enclosures: The enclosures for electrical equipment (e.g., panels, switches, breakers) shall
have the proper National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) rating for the atmosphere and
environment in which the equipment is being installed.
•	Extreme Cold: Electrical equipment such as emergency generators, transformers and switch gear installed
in weatherproof enclosures of the facility that are subject to extremely cold temperatures shall be
provided with supplemental heating within the enclosures. Use of engine block heaters shall also be
considered where warranted.
•	Noise: Noise mitigation shall be provided for equipment, such as transformers and generators, in
accordance with local codes (for offsite impacts) and with Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) requirements (for onsite impacts).
1.7	Commissioning
Commissioning is required for all EPA new construction and renovation projects, unless the EPA Project Manager
and EPA Real Property Services Staff Branch Chief agree that commissioning is not justified. The EPA will separately
contract for an independent Commissioning Authority during the pre-design phase. The EPA's commissioning
process is documented in the EPA Building Commissioning Guidelines. Systems to be considered for commissioning
include the building envelope (e.g., walls, roofing, windows, doors), plumbing systems, HVAC system, BAS controls,
electrical systems, fire protection and life safety systems, renewable energy systems, and security systems. The
Project A/E and the Construction Contractor shall coordinate with the independent Commissioning Authority per
the roles and responsibilities outlined in the EPA Building Commissioning Guidelines.
The fire protection and life safety systems component of commissioning shall comply with NFPA 3, Recommended
Practice for Commissioning of Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems. In addition, the integrated fire protection
and life safety system testing procedures developed and conducted by the Construction Contractor shall meet
NFPA 4, Standard for Integrated Fire Protection and Life Safety System Testing.
1.8	Construction Process
1.8.1 Construction Management
To ensure that construction activities are conducted in accordance with applicable requirements, statements of
work and specifications, the Construction Contractor shall provide the following plans for the EPA's review and
approval:
1-12 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	A Work Plan that includes roles and responsibilities and project schedule and milestones. As part of the
Work Plan, the Construction Contractor will conduct weekly project management meetings to review
project status and resolve issues.
•	A Construction Quality Control (CQC) Plan that will implement the requirements of the quality control
(QC) system. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance
of an interim plan applicable to the work to be started. As part of the CQC Plan, the Construction
Contractor shall:
-	Establish a program for inspection of activities affecting quality that covers both onsite and offsite
construction operations. At a minimum, inspections must be performed at the following times: prior
to beginning any work on any definable feature of work; as soon as a representative portion of a
feature of work has been accomplished; daily following the initial inspection of the accomplished
work; and at completion of a feature of work.
-	Establish a test program to ensure that all required materials testing procedures are properly
identified, planned, documented, and performed under controlled and suitable environmental
conditions.
-	Provide the control, verification and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test, including
the test name, specification paragraph requiring a test, feature of work to be tested and person
responsible for each test.
The Project A/E shall provide quality assurance (QA) for the verification of the adequacy and effectiveness
of the Construction Contractor's QC testing.
•	A Construction Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) and/or Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC)
Plan (see Section 3.2.5, Stormwater Runoff, within these A&E Guidelines). As part of the SWP3 and/or ESC
Plan, the Project A/E shall conduct regular inspections of the erosion and sediment controls (during
construction) and stormwater management system (post-construction).
•	An Emergency Response Plan, to ensure a plan in place to deal with emergencies and unforeseen events.
•	As applicable, a Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) Plan.
The Construction Contractor shall provide submittals during construction that include, but are not limited to:
•	Daily or weekly construction reports, including photos and videos when requested, as determined by the
EPA Project Manager.
•	Minutes from regularly scheduled construction progress meetings.
•	Inspection and testing report forms.
•	Interim progress reports.
•	Hot work and confined space entry permits.
The Construction Contractor shall permit the EPA's selected independent Commissioning Authority to conduct
scheduled or unscheduled monitoring and inspections during construction activities. Any identified issues that
cannot be resolved shall be brought to the attention of the EPA Project Manager for evaluation and resolution.
1.8.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management
To protect and manage indoor air quality during construction and prior to occupancy, the Construction Contractor
shall:
•	Submit a Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan for the EPA's review and approval detailing
how the below requirements will be implemented.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-13

-------
•	Follow the recommendations in the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
(SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction for construction in both occupied and
unoccupied space.
•	Avoid using permanent HVAC equipment serving construction areas during facility construction work. If
the permanent HVAC system must be used during the construction process, the following conditions must
be met:
-	A complete air filtration system, in compliance with the SMACNA standard mentioned above, is
installed and properly maintained.
-	All filter media is inspected on a weekly basis and replaced if excessive loading or filter damage is
noted.
-	No permanent diffusers are used.
-	No plenum-type return air system(s) are employed.
-	The HVAC duct system is adequately sealed to prevent the spread of airborne particulate and other
contaminants.
•	Prohibit all construction personnel from smoking within the building(s) under construction or renovation
and within 25 feet of all building entrances, operable windows and building ventilation intakes.
•	After construction is completed and prior to flush-out or indoor air quality testing:
-	Use high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) vacuums to clean any ductwork that was (1) used to move
supply or return air during construction; or (2) within the project boundaries and reused/remained in
place. Confirm ductwork cleanliness using the verification methods in the National Air Duct Cleaners
Association Assessment, Cleaning, and Restoration of HVAC Systems standard.
-	Remove temporary filters and duct coverings used during construction and install new air filtration
media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13 or better.
-	Conduct HVAC system testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) after any HVAC system alteration to
ensure the system is operating according to design specifications.
•	After all interior finish installations, punch-list items, cleaning and HVAC TAB are complete, follow the
flush-out or air testing requirements of the LEED for Building Design and Construction: New Construction
v4 "Indoor Air Quality Assessment" credit (regardless of whether the project is pursuing LEED
certification).
•	If the project implemented a flush-out, inspect the HVAC filters after the flush-out and install new
MERV 13 or better air filters if necessary.
1.8.3 Construction Waste Management
The Construction Contractor shall recycle as much material as possible throughout all project phases. To
accomplish this, the Construction Contractor shall:
•	Submit a Construction Waste Management Plan for the EPA's review and approval detailing how the
waste stream will be separated and managed.
•	Provide onsite instruction on the appropriate separation, handling, salvage, reuse, recycling and return
methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
•	Each month, provide delivery receipts for materials sent to the permitted reuse, recycling, processing or
landfill/incineration facilities, with all of the following information:
-	Name of the firm accepting the materials.
1-14 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
-	Type of facility accepting the materials (e.g., retail facility, recycler, processor, landfill, materials
recovery facility).
-	Location of the facility.
-	Type of materials being sent to the facility.
-	Net weights of each type of material being sent to the facility.
-	Date of delivery to the facility.
-	Value of the materials or tipping fee paid.
•	Upon completion of project, provide a final accounting of disposition of all materials.
The Construction Waste Management Plan shall ensure the following EPA recycling targets are met or exceeded:
•	For projects less than 20,000 gross square feet, a minimum of 50 percent of construction waste by weight
shall be salvaged, reused or recycled.
•	For projects greater than or equal to 20,000 gross square feet, a minimum of 75 percent of construction
waste by weight shall be salvaged, reused or recycled.
The recycling targets shall be included in the specifications and contract documents.
1.8.4 Project Closeout
As part of project closeout, the Project A/E, Construction Contractor, Commissioning Authority and other team
members shall conduct activities and provide submittals that include, but are not limited to, the items described
below.
Red Zone Meeting
The Red Zone meeting will be held approximately 60 days prior to the beneficial occupancy date. The EPA Project
Manager, Project A/E, Construction Contractor, Commissioning Authority and other necessary team members will
meet to discuss the closeout process, to schedule activities, and to assign responsibilities for these activities to
complete a timely physical and financial project closeout. During the Red Zone meeting, the team will discuss
actions and documents that affect construction warranty management and turnover of the facility. These include,
but are not limited to, O&M manuals, training, as-built and record drawings, warranty plan, performance
verification test dates, fire alarm and fire protection system tests, pre-commissioning dates, and commissioning
dates.
Punch List
Prior to acceptance of the work, the Construction Contractor shall participate with the EPA Project Manager and
Project A/E in a pre-final inspection and develop a punch list of items that do not conform to the approved plans
and specifications. The Construction Contractor shall document when and how punch list items are addressed and
provide the documentation to the EPA Project Manager and Project A/E for review.
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
The Construction Contractor shall retain an independent TAB contractor to test, adjust and balance the air-moving
equipment, air distribution system, water system, gas system and compressed air piping systems, as applicable.
The independent TAB contractor shall be an organization that is a member of the Associated Air Balance Council
(AABC) and/or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). A TAB report shall be provided to the EPA
Project Manager.
After TAB has been completed and the TAB report has been approved by the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division,
unless otherwise directed by the EPA Project Manager, the Construction Contractor shall have each laboratory
fume hood tested and certified by a third-party, qualified fume hood testing agent in accordance with the
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 1. General Requirements 1-15

-------
EPA Performance Requirements for Laboratory Fume Hoods "as installed" requirements. An EPA Safety and
Sustainability Division representative must be present to witness the tests.
Commissioning
The Project A/E and Construction Contractor (including the TAB contractor and BAS contractor) shall coordinate
and cooperate with the EPA's independent Commissioning Authority throughout the design and construction
process in accordance with the roles and responsibilities outlined in the EPA Building Commissioning Guidelines. As
stated in these Guidelines, one of the many responsibilities of the Construction Contractor is to prepare testing
procedures, provide all tools and instruments required for the commissioning process, complete pre-functional
and functional testing, and correct any deficiencies. The Commissioning Authority will provide a final
commissioning report.
Final Inspection
After punch list items, TAB and commissioning are complete, the EPA Project Manager and Project A/E shall
conduct a final inspection to verify conformance.
Warranty Plan
The Construction Contractor's Warranty Plan shall provide the information necessary to contact the Construction
Contractor during the warranty period and shall include the Construction Contractor's procedures for correcting
warranty issues. The EPA Project Manager and EPA Facility Manager will review the plan prior to approval and
ensure that a warranty inspection is completed before project closeout.
Final Cleaning
After substantial completion, the Construction Contractor shall conduct a final cleaning.
As-Built and Record Documents
The Construction Contractor shall provide redline as-built drawings and specifications. The Project A/E shall
prepare final record drawings to include the Construction Contractor's noted as-built conditions.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals
The Construction Contractor shall prepare O&M manuals and provide training to the building O&M personnel on
how to operate the building. The O&M manuals must include, at a minimum, as-built/record drawings,
environmental regulatory operating licenses/registrations/permits for each piece of equipment, equipment data,
model numbers for the equipment, parts lists, equipment options, operating manuals for each piece of equipment,
TAB reports and certifications, maintenance schedules, videos, and warranty schedules. The manuals will be
reviewed and certified as complete by the EPA Project Manager before submission to the EPA Facility Manager.
Sustainable Building Certification
The Project A/E must provide documentation and certification that the project has been designed and constructed
to meet the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings and any other federal, state or local sustainable
building requirements.
For projects pursuing LEED certification, within 90 days of construction completion, the Project A/E shall submit
LEED construction phase prerequisites and credits to the appropriate certification body for review. The Project A/E
in coordination with the Construction Contractor shall respond to requests from the certification body for
additional clarifications and/or documentation in order to achieve construction phase prerequisites and credits.
Upon receipt of LEED certification, the Project A/E shall provide the EPA electronic copies (in PDF format) of all
final documentation submitted to the certification body.
1-16 Chapter 1. General Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
2. Security
2.1 Process for Determining Security Requirements
Given the dynamic and ever-changing risk scenarios that threaten the physical security of EPA facilities, it is of
paramount importance that personnel within the EPA Office of Administration and Resources Management's
Security Management Division are included during all planning and discussion aspects of facility site selection,
design, engineering and construction. The EPA Security Management Division's subject matter experts (SMEs) are
available to provide counsel and direction to ensure that EPA facilities remain in compliance with established
physical security policies and standards.
The EPA Security Management Division has developed the below guidance to assist Regional Security
Representatives, architects and engineers, and facilities personnel with determining the physical resources needed
to protect personnel and mission-critical equipment and data. Each EPA facility, whether leased or owned, is
unique and inherent differences such as physical design, physical access points, geographic location, threat
environment and age of the structure(s)—among others—will have a direct impact upon security
countermeasures. At a minimum, when determining site needs, capabilities of the systems and placement
location(s) for countermeasures, planners shall refer to the U.S. Department of Homeland Security's Interagency
Security Committee's (ISC's) policies, standards and best practices, as well as standards and guidance set forth by
NIST. Both the ISC and NIST have established and organized standards in seven security areas:
•	Site Security: Including the site perimeter, site access, exterior areas and assets, and parking.
•	Structure Security: Including structural hardening, facade, windows and building system.
•	Facility Entrance Security: Employee and visitor pedestrian entrances and exits, loading docks, and other
openings in the building envelope.
•	Interior Security: Space planning and security of specific interior spaces.
•	Security Systems: Intrusion detection systems (IDS), physical access control systems (PACS) and closed-
circuit television (CCTV) security systems.
•	Security Operations and Administration Criteria: Planning, guard force operations, management and
decision-making, and mail handling and receiving.
•	Cyber Security Criteria: Protections in place to reduce the loss of availability, integrity, and/or confidence
of a security system and identify when unauthorized access has occurred.
The EPA Security Management Division, working in collaboration with local regional/laboratory personnel and,
where applicable, representatives from the U.S. Department of Homeland Security's Federal Protective Services
(FPS), will conduct risk assessments for the purpose of ascertaining how best to strengthen and harden a facility,
thereby increasing the facility's level of protection. Facilities determined to have lower levels of risk will require
lower levels of protection and likely fewer countermeasures. Conversely, facilities with higher levels of risk will
require higher levels of protection and the implementation of greater countermeasures. Increasing a level of
protection is possible through the utilization and/or installation of countermeasures, including, but not limited, to
PACS, CCTV security systems, IDS and duress alarms.
The ISC's The Risk Management Process for Federal Facilities outlines criteria for assigning a facility security level
(FSL) to a facility. The FSL (Level I, II, III, IV or V) is determined based on several factors, including mission criticality,
symbolism, facility population, facility size and threat to tenant agencies.
Knowing, at a minimum, the FSL for each facility, the risk factors unique to that facility and the baseline level of
protection, the subsequent sections of this document provide guidance to determine the physical resources
needed to protect personnel and mission-critical equipment and data.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 2. Security 2-1

-------
2.2 Physical Access Control Systems (FSL-III and Higher)
PACS readers are required at the following locations:
•	All primary entry points into EPA controlled space.
•	Doors leading from the interior stairwells onto each of the EPA's floors in multi-tenant facilities.
•	Doors leading from the freight elevator lobbies onto each of the EPA's floors.
•	Doors leading into restricted access locations such as data centers, or restricted areas housing critical
equipment such as the PACS, CCTV system/feeds and security alarm panels.
•	Door leading into locations where sensitive documents are held such as Confidential Business Information
file rooms.
•	Doors leading into a Regional Emergency Operations Center.
Other doors into these suites/areas, from the common hallways, shall be egress only from the interior suite side.
The EPA is moving to the utilization of PACS readers that have multi-factor authentication capabilities. Which
authentication factors are or are not "turned-on" on each individual reader will depend on where the reader is
located and under what environment the reader is operating. For example, a door protected by a full-time security
guard may only require a single authentication factor; whereas, unguarded doors may require a PACS reader with
multi-factor authentication. Table 2-1 below outlines the security categories and number of authentication factors
recommended in NIST Special Publication 800-116, A Recommendation for the Use of PIV Credential in PACS. For
each security category, Table 2-1 lists example EPA spaces that require this level of security and authentication.
The designation of "Controlled," "Limited" and "Exclusion" areas shall be applied to the protected areas within
every EPA facility.
Table 2-1: Categorization of EPA Spaces by Security Category
Security Category
Number of
Authentication
Factors
Example EPA Spaces
Unrestricted
0
Building lobby, visitors center, roadways, cafeterias, gift shop, recreation
facilities, employee general access to multi-tenant buildings
Controlled
1
Primary building entry points, access to program areas, hazmat supplies,
facility services
Limited
2
Special program area storage, data/telephone closets, electrical closet, areas
storing sensitive documents or mission critical equipment, data center,
specialized lab space
Exclusion
3
Most sensitive areas such as those containing trade secrets: secure access
facilities
For facilities determined to have an FSL-I or FSL-II rating, entry and exit points, as well as access points (doors) into
critical areas, shall be secured with non-removable hinges, automatic closers, and high-security mechanical or
electronic locks. Procedures for limiting access shall also be established at these levels. PACS readers are not
required, but may be installed in selected locations as warranted.
2.3 Closed-Circuit Television Security Systems
The design and necessary capabilities of the CCTV security system will depend on several factors, including the
security level of the facility, the type of facility, the environment in and around the facility, as well as the EPA's
needs. Facilities with lower designated security levels will likely need a CCTV security system that provides
coverage of entrances, exits and pedestrian areas.
2-2 Chapter 2. Security Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
As the FSL increases, then so too will the requirements for the CCTV security system. For higher level risk facilities,
systems will need to be designed to capture views of both personnel and vehicles entering or leaving the facility, as
well as monitor entry and exits from critical and/or sensitive areas such as interior lobbies, parking garages and
loading dock areas. CCTV security system standards for each FSL are listed below:
•	FSL-IV: Provide coverage of screening checkpoints, exits, loading docks, lobbies, facility perimeter, parking
areas, sensitive interior areas, pedestrian and vehicle entrances, and other potential access points.
•	FSL-III: Provide coverage of screening checkpoints, exits, loading docks and lobbies.
•	FSL-II: Provide coverage of personnel entrances and exits.
•	FSL-I: No coverage is required.
CCTV security systems are to be mounted on ceilings or locations high along the wall which afford clear lines of
sight to PACS-controlled entry points into the EPA space. Although multi-view cameras may be selected, thus
limiting the number of installed devices, it may still be necessary to install multiple cameras within the same
area/proximity for clear lines of sight.
2.4 Intrusion Detection Systems
The IDS shall provide protection based on the site-specific FSL (see Table 2-2). The entire system shall be
monitored at the facility's security operations center and locally recorded to monitor as evidentiary data if
necessary. Depending on site-specific characteristics and security levels, the system may be remotely monitored
and then programmed to automatically notify FPS, local law enforcement or the onsite security guard force in the
event of an intrusion.
Table 2-2: IDS Standards by FSL
FSL
IDS Standard
IV
IDS Coverage
Provide IDS on perimeter entry and exit doors, and all windows within 16 feet of the ground
or other access point.
IDS Monitoring
Monitor at an onsite central station during operating hours, and offsite after hours, with
response by law enforcement or security responders.
III
IDS Coverage
Provide IDS on perimeter entry and exit doors, and all ground-floor windows.
IDS Monitoring
Monitor at a central station (onsite or offsite) with notification to law enforcement or security
responders.
II
IDS Coverage
Provide IDS on perimeter entry and exit doors, and operable ground-floor windows.
IDS Monitoring
Monitor at a central station with notification to a building manager or designated tenant point
of contact.
1
IDS Monitoring
Install local annunciation if IDS is in use.
Roof access doors or hatches shall be secured with heavy-duty hardware and equipped with an alarm.
Additional critical areas where IDS shall be placed include access points to data processing centers, regional file
centers, offices where sensitive records such as personnel files or confidential information are stored, and
laboratories or other locations where hazardous materials may be used or stored.
2.5 Duress Alarms (Assistance Stations)
A duress alarm, sometimes referred to as a panic alarm, shall be installed at key public locations and other areas
within EPA offices determined to have potential high threats and risks. Duress alarms may be silent and hidden so
as not to alert an assailant that an alarm has been activated. They may be installed in areas to include visitor
security screening stations, the Regional Administrator's suite, public hearing rooms, libraries and parking garages.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 2. Security 2-3

-------
Visible alarm stations and/or call boxes shall be placed in critical areas such as parking garages, walkways between
buildings on a larger campus or in laboratory settings in the event of an emergency. Duress alarms shall
automatically notify FPS, local law enforcement or the onsite security guard force.
2.6 Supplemental Countermeasures
Beyond the installation of countermeasures interior to the building and exterior to the perimeter, consideration
shall be given for utilizing supplemental countermeasures as further means to harden a facility and to protect
employees. Listed below are a sampling of supplemental countermeasures for consideration when designing the
facility:
•	Video Intercom System: Where permissible, an alternative solution to the installation of a full CCTV
security system is the use of a video intercom system. When located outside restricted access areas, such
as the Regional Administrator's suite, these devices enable personnel to identify a visitor and the purpose
for their visit before entry is granted.
•	Exterior Lighting: Install exterior lighting at entrances, exits, parking lots, garages and walkways from
parking areas to entrances.
•	Fencing and Barriers: Install fencing, landscaping or other barriers to channel pedestrians to authorized
areas or entrances. For existing fences, consider raising the height of the fence. Consideration can also be
given for placing razor wire at the top of the fence to prohibit scaling and topping the fence as a means
into the facility.
•	Locks: Utilize hardened mechanisms such as cipher locks to control access into restricted areas.
•	Receptacle and Container Placement: Position trash containers, mailboxes, vending machines, etc., away
from buildings, or implement blast containment measures to mitigate an explosion.
•	Vehicle Barriers: Provide vehicle barriers to protect pedestrian and vehicle access points and critical
areas/utilities from vehicle intrusions.
2-4 Chapter 2. Security Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
3. Planning and Siting
3.1 Siting Requirements
3.1.1	General Siting Considerations
It is necessary to assess, analyze and address all site-related issues outlined below and to comply with the
requirements of the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings; other federal, state, and local mandates;
and, where applicable, the GSA Public Building Service (PBS)-PIOO, Facilities Standards for the Public Building
Service.
3.1.2	Land Area
When planning and siting EPA facilities, the land and adjacent area will be considered during site selection. In
general, the EPA encourages building on previously developed land, rather than on undeveloped property.
If brownfield sites are considered, the Project A/E must identify and select remedial actions and receive EPA
approval prior to remediation. (Note: Remediation may occur before and/or during construction, as appropriate.
For example, areas of contaminated soil are often removed during foundation investigations or installation.)
3.1.3	Floodplains
When siting the facility, the Project A/E shall locate any 100-year and 500-year floodplains in the area and
delineate the floodplain boundaries on all surveys and site plans. To the extent possible, facilities shall not be sited
in areas subject to flash floods.
The Project A/E must meet the Federal Flood Risk Management Standard, which requires selection of one of the
following three approaches for establishing the flood elevation and hazard area:
•	Use the best-available actionable hydrologic and hydraulic data and methods.
•	Build 2 feet of freeboard above the base flood elevation (100-year, 1 percent annual chance flood
elevation) and 3 feet of freeboard for "critical actions."
•	Build to the 500-year (0.2 percent annual chance) flood elevation.
Records storage facilities are subject to more stringent floodplain requirements per 36 CFR 1234.
3.1.4	Zoning and Other Land Use Controls
During the planning process and development of associated environmental documentation for new construction
and major renovation projects, all applicable local land development zoning requirements of the state and/or local
government must be considered. Even though the EPA is exempt from local zoning and building code requirements
(except in coastal zone areas), the EPA's policy is to follow local zoning requirements, wherever possible. These
requirements include, but are not limited to, laws relating to landscaping, open space, density limitations, building
setbacks, building height, buffer requirements, historic preservation, noise pollution, aesthetic qualities, critical
habitats, and other development guidelines or requirements.
Applicable zoning guidelines of university campuses, research parks or military bases will also be considered and
followed (e.g., where an EPA facility is part of a greater planned campus). When zoning codes conflict, the most
stringent standard must govern. Information on applicable codes must be submitted as part of planning and design
documents, as discussed below.
Laboratory facilities will be located in areas where local zoning allows; however, facilities must be no less than
0.25 miles from existing residential developments and must be located in such a way that prevailing winds will not
direct fumes exhausting from EPA stacks toward existing residential developments. The Project A/E must fully
investigate and address local zoning criteria to ensure zoning compliance for EPA facilities.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 3. Planning and Siting 3-1

-------
A brief overview of local zoning and land development codes and their impacts on site development shall be
included in planning and design documents. The potential transmission of noise above background levels is also a
key consideration when siting new laboratories or undertaking major renovations of laboratories that would
significantly increase existing noise levels.
Any proposed deviations from such codes and laws are to be documented and fully justified. Local regulations
must be followed with respect to systems that have a direct impact on offsite terrain or utility systems (e.g.,
stormwater runoff, erosion control, sanitary sewers and storm drains, water supply, gas, electrical power and
communications, emergency vehicle access, roads, bridges).
With respect to parking spaces, the design requirements given in the project's POR take precedence over zoning
ordinances. The Project A/E shall consider strategies to address and resolve any zoning concerns or conflicts.
3.1.5	Utilities
The location, availability, and capacity of existing (and future) utilities and services must be taken into account
when selecting and planning the project site. The siting of facilities near existing communities is strongly
encouraged to reduce natural and financial resources required for construction and maintenance of utilities
infrastructure.
Locations and designs for service lines must comply with local and utility service requirements. Utilities include,
but are not limited to, potable water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, electrical power and communications (e.g.,
telephone, data).
3.1.6	Historic Preservation
The use, preservation and rehabilitation of historic buildings for EPA facilities is encouraged. If the project site will
involve preservation and rehabilitation of an existing historic building, a qualified preservation design professional
must be hired by the Project A/E.
Section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA) requires federal agencies to consider the effects of
their undertakings on historic properties. Per 36 CFR 800, an undertaking is defined as "a project, activity, or
program funded in whole or in part under the direct or indirect jurisdiction of a Federal agency, including those
carried out by or on behalf of a Federal agency; those carried out with Federal financial assistance; and those
requiring a Federal permit, license or approval." Section 106 is a requirement for the project proponent, not
necessarily the land owner.
Activities at EPA facilities must comply with NHPA procedures when they will affect sites that are listed or eligible
for listing in the National Register of Historic Places. The EPA must determine whether there are properties that
are potentially eligible for listing on the National Register of Historic Places and if the proposed undertaking will
affect such potentially historic properties. This process includes consultation with the relevant State Historic
Preservation Officer. (For projects on Indian lands, the Tribal Historic Preservation Officer, the Advisory Council on
Historic Preservation and other identified consulting parties, such as local preservation organizations or
neighborhood groups, shall be consulted.)
A review of State Historic Preservation Officer/Tribal Historic Preservation Officer site files and state archaeological
site files, as well as a site visit and survey of the Area of Potential Effect, shall be included in the project plan. This
work must be conducted by a professional meeting The Secretary of the Interior's Historic Preservation Professional
Qualification Standards.
For projects that also require a National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) analysis, the Section 106 processes can
be combined with the NEPA effort. For more information, consult the Council on Environmental Quality's and the
Advisory Council on Historic Preservation's NEPA and NHPA: A Handbook for Integrating NEPA and Section 106 and
the EPA Environmental Management Manual.
3-2 Chapter 3. Planning and Siting Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
3.1.7 "Smart Growth" Considerations
Smart growth principles shall be considered and encouraged for the sustainable siting of facilities, where
practicable. Local zoning laws and smart growth guidelines must be considered and incorporated into EPA facility
siting and design. A fundamental component of community sustainability and effective local economic
development includes coordination with other long-range plans for the area. The Project A/E shall engage relevant
planning officials at the metropolitan, county or municipal level early in the site selection process to discuss the
proposed development and understand local planning goals.
3.2 Pre-Development Investigations
Pre-development investigations are required for all projects. A pre-development investigation will include some or
all of the following: land surveys, geotechnical and subsurface investigations, environmental investigations, and
stormwater hydrology investigations.
The purpose of the pre-development investigation is to provide the EPA with sufficient and pertinent data to allow
a complete evaluation of the physical conditions of the given project site. The Project A/E will review the pre-
development investigation to determine key design parameters, constraints and considerations for the project.
A key component of the pre-development investigation is the site resource inventory and analysis. This will include
investigation of soil information, identification of site vegetation, hydrology and drainage analysis, topographic and
elevation analysis, and analysis of view corridors and other physical characteristics of the site.
A buildable area plan will be developed by compiling information from the various analyses and drawings. This
plan will indicate the acres of land that are suitable for construction. The site resource inventory and analysis shall
include, but must not be limited to, the following:
•	The site overview, including location, parcel delineation and acreage, existing zoning, and adjoining land
uses.
•	Physical site characteristic analyses, including slope analysis, elevation analysis, existing vegetation
identification, hydrology analysis, geological and soils analysis, site analysis, buildable areas analysis,
wetlands analysis, solar and shadow studies, and analysis of prevailing winds.
•	Utilities overview and analysis, including stormwater drainage, potable water, sanitary sewer, electrical
power and communications, and mechanical systems.
In addition, the Project A/E must consider local planning and zoning criteria for the subject property. This
consideration will include investigation of all potential site development regulations, such as density limitations,
building setbacks/standoff distances, building height, building coverage, buffer requirements, and other
development guidelines set forth in any applicable campus, site, or facility master plan or elsewhere in these A&E
Guidelines.
It is recommended that an onsite investigation and review be conducted, which includes representatives of the
EPA, the Project A/E and the site owner, to verify land features indicated on the survey. Photographs shall be taken
at various locations to provide a visual record to aid in the development of the site analysis drawings.
Some pre-development investigation activities will be performed before or after the site resource inventory and
analysis is completed. Requirements and guidelines, as they pertain to specific pre-development investigations, are
discussed below.
3.2.1 Land Surveys
Land surveys must be performed for all applicable construction projects, typically for projects involving site work.
All land surveys must be performed by, or under the supervision of, a Professional Engineer and/or land surveyor
registered in the state of performance.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 3. Planning and Siting 3-3

-------
At a minimum, the survey(s) must show legal property boundaries, easements, and legal restrictions, as well as all
anthropogenic and natural physical characteristics, utility service locations (temporary and permanent), horizontal
and vertical controls, benchmarks, roadways, and parking areas.
Land surveys will conform to GSA PBS-P100 and the Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTA/ACSM Land
Title Surveys, as applicable. The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property and topographic surveys shall
be consistent with each survey.
Engineering stake-outs must be prepared for all foundation footprints to verify that the footprint is entirely within
the property legal description. Where requested, construction staking and as-built surveys for new EPA facilities
shall comply with local standards and with practices approved by the EPA Project Manager.
Survey field notes shall be legibly recorded. Field notes, final plat-of-surveys, boundary surveys and recorded maps
shall be submitted to the EPA Project Manager.
3.2.2 Geotechnical/Subsurface Investigation
For projects involving site work, subsurface/geotechnical investigations are required. Subsurface and geotechnical
investigations will take place during site selection, building design and/or construction.
Preliminary subsurface exploration will be performed by a geotechnical Professional Engineer licensed in the state
where the work is being performed. In the case that the Professional Engineer is a licensed civil engineer,
geotechnical expertise must be demonstrated through experience, as approved by the EPA Project Manager. The
geotechnical engineer will supervise all required testing, review and analyze all data and samples, and submit a
report.
All tests will be performed by independent testing laboratories. Subsurface investigations and submittal
requirements shall conform to the guidelines outlined in GSA PBS-P100, Appendix A, Section A.5, as applicable. The
geotechnical engineer shall include in the report how best to address site-specific situations, such as soft soils,
non-native fill materials, and unstable surfaces and subsurface features (e.g., landslide, subsidence, earthquake
hazard).
Subsequent subsurface geotechnical investigations must be performed under the direction of a licensed
Professional Engineer. For permanent structures, subsurface conditions will be determined by means of
exploratory soil borings or other methods that allow the engineer to adequately determine soil and groundwater
conditions.
A profile of soil permeability, for use during design of the site stormwater management system, must be
determined using ASTM D3385, Standard Test Method for Infiltration Rate of Soils in Field Using Double-Ring
I nfi Urometer, or ASTM D5093, Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Infiltration Rate Using Double-Ring
Infiltrometer with Sealed-Inner Ring. Data obtained from previous and preliminary subsurface investigations will be
used, along with any additional investigations at the location that are deemed necessary. Groundwater levels must
be recorded when initially encountered and after they have been allowed to stabilize. In earthquake-prone areas,
appropriate geological investigations must be made to determine the contribution of the foundation (subsurface)
to the dynamic earthquake loads imposed on the structure.
These investigations shall include, but must not be limited to, a recommendation of foundation type,
determinations of allowable soil bearing capacity and assessment of the possible effects of seismic activity on the
soil mass. A settlement analysis under different design loads shall be performed where differential settlement will
cause structural, architectural or any other type of building damage. Possible mitigating measures (e.g., piers, piles,
caissons, dampers) must be evaluated. (See the discussion under Geologic Hazard Investigation below.)
The Project A/E's results and engineering recommendations from subsurface investigations shall be submitted to
and reviewed by the EPA Project Manager. Additional subsurface investigation requirements and documentation
are discussed in the following sections.
3-4 Chapter 3. Planning and Siting Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Groundwater Investigation
A groundwater investigation must be performed for projects involving site work and for projects involving the
selection of a dewatering control system. The investigation must examine the character of subsurface soils,
groundwater conditions and groundwater quality. The source of seepage shall be determined, and the boundaries
and seepage flow characteristics of geologic and soil formations at, and adjacent to, the site must be analyzed in
accordance with the mathematical, graphic and electro-analogous methods discussed in federal Unified Facilities
Criteria (UFC) 3-220-05, Dewatering and Groundwater Control.
Geologic Hazard Investigation
During the planning and siting phase, a geologic hazard report must be prepared for all new building construction
in regions of low, moderate and high seismicity, except for structures located in regions of low seismicity designed
to the Life Safety Performance Level, as defined by the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)/Structural
Engineering Institute (SEI) 41, Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings.
In-depth geologic hazard investigations are not generally required for minor facilities for which earthquake
damage would not pose significant risk to building occupants or the property. However, in general, new building
complexes and high-rise buildings shall have a thorough geologic hazard investigation performed.
If the geologic hazard investigation is not a stand-alone report, it shall be addressed in a section of the
geotechnical and subsurface investigation report, and it shall include recommendations for hazard mitigation.
Geologic hazards to be considered and avoided when siting the facility include, but are not limited to, active fault
lines, areas with soils susceptible to liquefaction, and zones susceptible to slope failure or landsliding. Refer to GSA
PBS-P100 Appendix A, Section A.5 for additional guidance on geologic hazard report requirements and
applicability.
3.2.3	Environmental Investigations
Environmental investigations must be performed prior to activities on a project site. As part of the environmental
investigations, available historical records shall be thoroughly reviewed to determine if contamination is present.
Under the purview of NEPA, a categorical exclusion, environmental assessment or environmental impact
statement will be required. For additional information in determining applicability and project requirements for
NEPA review, refer to Section 3.3, NEPA Screening and Assessment, within these A&E Guidelines.
In addition, projects involving acquisition, transfer or termination of EPA interests in a real property must comply
with the Community Environmental Response Facilitation Act, the Federal Property and Administrative Services
Act, and 40 CFR 373, Reporting Hazardous Substance Activity When Selling or Transferring Federal Real Property.
Compliance with these requirements is facilitated through an Environmental Due Diligence Process (EDDP), which
will identify, document, manage and mitigate potential contamination associated with the EPA's interest in the
property. For additional information in determining applicability of an EDDP review, refer to Section 3.4,
Environmental Due Diligence Process Activities and Review, within these A&E Guidelines.
Results from the NEPA and EDDP environmental investigations shall be provided to the EPA Project Manager and
the Project A/E to inform the project design. Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual for additional
information.
3.2.4	Stormwater Hydrology Investigation
Stormwater hydrologic analysis must be performed in accordance with applicable local and state regulations, as
well as the EPA Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects
under Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act. The stricter of EPA stormwater management
requirements or the local or state code will prevail. Local regulations vary, with hydrologic analyses and
investigations often required for sites, based on the size of the site and the estimated pre-/post-development
discharges. The Project A/E must consider the impacts that the project will have on the site and local environment
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 3. Planning and Siting 3-5

-------
with respect to surface water quality, drainage and runoff (during both construction and longer-term operation of
the project).
Where available, local precipitation data shall be used in lieu of regional data for site-specific hydrologic modeling.
The following information must be assembled for use in the hydrologic modeling of the project:
•	Geographic location.
•	Precipitation frequency data.
•	Drainage area.
•	Soil and cover.
•	Runoff distribution.
•	Groundwater.
•	Rainfall intensity-duration curves based on historic record.
For the rainfall intensity measure, the design storm events must be based on a study of precipitation frequency,
runoff potential and runoff distribution relative to the physical characteristics of the watershed. At a minimum, the
rainfall intensity measure must be the 95th percentile rainfall intensity based on at least the last 30 years of data,
wherever available. (The 95th percentile rainfall intensity is the rainfall intensity that 95 percent of storms do not
exceed.)
Where available, stream gauge data shall be used to estimate design flows in major channels. Where stream gauge
data are inadequate or unavailable, rainfall information shall be taken from documented sources, such as the
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Atlas 14. Design storm precipitation values taken from
documented sources or derived by published engineering methodology must be used to estimate design flood
discharges.
The hydrologic analysis will also be a component of the site resource inventory and analysis. In addition, it will
assist with the site development design, particularly for stormwater management design.
3.2.5 Stormwater Runoff
Local code requirements for stormwater detention and retention must be followed. For construction or
renovations that disturb more than 5,000 square feet of land, the predevelopment hydrology of the property must
be maintained or restored to the maximum extent feasible, with respect to temperature, rate, volume and
duration (EISA, Section 438).
Site plans will incorporate QC measures that reduce the concentration of pollutants in stormwater prior to
discharging into receiving waters.
Construction sites that disturb areas of one acre or greater will be required to obtain a National Pollutant
Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit, including developing a site SWP3. Parking lot retrofits and rebuilds
also must meet EISA requirements.
For guidance on stormwater management, refer to Section 4.1, Stormwater Management, within these A&E
Guidelines, as well as the EPA Environmental Management Manual.
NPDES Discharges
Construction activities at EPA facilities that disturb one or more acres of land will be required to obtain a NPDES
construction general permit. The specific construction general permit and application requirements are defined by
the NPDES permitting authority (state or federal). These requirements may vary slightly but generally include:
3-6 Chapter 3. Planning and Siting Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	Submittal of a Notice of Intent that includes general information and a certification that the activity will
not impact endangered or threatened species. This certification is unique to the EPA's Notice of Intent
and is not a requirement of most NPDES-delegated state Notices of Intent.
•	Development and implementation of an SWP3, describing appropriate best management practices
(BMPs) to minimize the discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff from the site.
•	Submittal of a Notice of Termination when final stabilization of the site has been achieved, as defined in
the permit or when another operator has assumed control of the site.
The primary method to control stormwater discharges at a construction site is through the use of BMPs. Refer to
EPA 833-R-060-04, Developing Your Stormwater Management Plan—A Guide for Construction Sites, for guidance
on developing SWP3s and for examples of proven stormwater management BMPs. Refer to the EPA Environmental
Management Manual for additional guidance on NPDES requirements with respect to stormwater discharges and
construction operations.
Erosion and Sediment Control
ESC measures (often also referred to as construction stormwater BMPs) and post-construction stormwater
management BMPs must be implemented in accordance with federal, state, and local standards and permits. The
site shall be properly graded and planted to minimize erosion.
Depending on the permitting authority and project size, an ESC Plan may be required as part of the local
construction permit and NPDES permit application, integrated with (or over and above) the stormwater
management plan or SWP3. If required by the local state permitting authority, the ESC Plan shall be developed and
integrated with the stormwater management plan and SWP3.
3.2.6	Wastewater Discharges
All wastewater discharges from EPA facilities, including discharges during construction activities, must comply with
Clean Water Act requirements, as well as state and local restrictions. Depending on the activities at the EPA site, a
wastewater discharge pre-authorization or permit may be required to discharge to the local publicly owned
treatment works (POTW) water treatment facility.
For facilities that will have wastewater contaminants exceeding the requirements set forth by the EPA, state
agencies and/or the local POTW, appropriate pretreatment equipment and systems must be installed prior to
discharge to the sanitary sewer, and must meet EPA specifications and/or the requirements of the POTW and
NPDES, as applicable.
Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual for additional information on wastewater management at
EPA facilities.
3.2.7	Air Emissions
The Project A/E must assess all sources of air emissions and comply with federal, state and local requirements. The
Project A/E must obtain any required air emissions construction permits and operating permits for the facility,
prior to the start of construction.
Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual for additional guidance on air permitting requirements.
3.3 NEPA Screening and Assessment
3.3.1 Determining Required Level of Screening and Assessment
NEPA regulations apply to all EPA facility construction projects, regardless of size. The EPA Safety and Sustainability
Division will be responsible for the NEPA review of projects, and they must follow the procedures outlined below:
•	Determine the appropriate level of NEPA review for a proposed construction project.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 3. Planning and Siting 3-7

-------
•	Define the significant issues to be analyzed through information gathering, scoping meetings and public
participation.
•	Evaluate project alternatives, including the proposed action and possible mitigation measures, to
determine whether their environmental impacts are significant, not significant or none at all.
•	Develop documentation to assist the public and decision-makers in evaluating the proposed action and
alternatives.
The NEPA review process is not limited to strictly ecological effects, such as air and water quality. Effects to be
considered also include aesthetic, cultural, historic, health and socio-economic impacts.
The EPA Project Manager is responsible for coordinating with the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division and
ensuring that EPA facility construction projects comply with NEPA. If the EPA is working with the GSA to construct
new space, the GSA is the lead agency and will prepare the documentation, and the EPA Project Manager will
coordinate with the GSA as needed. The EPA Project Manager shall incorporate NEPA review for a proposed action
at the earliest possible opportunity and promote continuous communication throughout the project until the
NEPA process is complete. The final NEPA documentation shall be provided to the Project A/E to inform the project
design.
3.3.2 Categorical Exclusions, Environmental Assessments and Environmental Impact Statements
NEPA compliance evaluations and reviews shall be conducted early in the planning and decision-making process
for construction projects. By doing so, the EPA will be able to identify viable alternatives, assess environmental
impacts of these alternatives, provide a basis for informed selection of a preferred alternative and evaluate
measures to mitigate adverse environmental effects of the selected alternative.
EPA projects are subject to the following levels of NEPA review and documentation:
•	Categorical exclusion (CX).
•	Environmental assessment (EA).
•	Environmental impact statement (EIS).
A CX project is an action that is deemed to have no significant impacts. These actions do not individually or
cumulatively have a substantial effect on the human environment. Actions include minor rehabilitation of existing
facilities, functional replacement of equipment and construction of new ancillary facilities adjacent to or
appurtenant to existing facilities. These are generally routine actions that normally do not require an EA or an EIS.
When a project does not meet the criteria for a CX, an EA must be prepared. The end result of an EA is a
determination of a Finding of No Significant Impact (FONSI) or a determination of significant impacts. In the latter
case, an EIS is required. Note that, if preliminary review of an action reveals obvious significant environmental
impacts, the review process should proceed directly to an EIS.
Because the need for an EIS indicates that significant environmental, social, cultural and/or other impacts are
anticipated, the EPA discourages the selection of project sites that would require an EIS. If an EIS is required, the
planning, development, distribution and public involvement will normally take 8 to 18 months to complete, hence,
substantially delaying project completion.
For projects likely requiring an EA or an EIS, a scoping meeting should be employed to help prepare a clear and
precise description of the proposed action and to identify reasonable alternatives.
Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual and EPA 200-K-16-001, National Environmental Policy Act
Review Procedures for EPA Facilities, for detailed procedural guidance and information on applicability of the NEPA
review processes.
3-8 Chapter 3. Planning and Siting Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
3.4 Environmental Due Diligence Process Activities and Review
During a property transfer process, several EDDP review activities must be performed by various EPA
organizations, including the EPA Office of Administration, EPA Safety and Sustainability Division, and applicable
program and regional offices, to ensure that real property is transferred legally, on time and within budget. These
activities can typically be performed either independently or concurrently and include:
•	Equipment deactivation and decommissioning.
•	Facility surveillance and monitoring.
•	Removal and management of chemicals and hazardous substances.
•	Permit/license transfer or termination.
•	Management of personal property and surplus equipment.
•	Building restoration and improvements.
•	Coordinating and facilitating the EDDP.
EDDP review activities shall be applied when acquiring, transferring or terminating the EPA's interests in any real
property. When terminating the EPA's interest in real property, the results of the EDDP must be used to determine
whether an environmental condition notification to purchasers or recipients is required under federal, state and
local law. When transferring property to third parties, the results of the EDDP review shall be used to establish a
baseline environmental record of the property as a defense against future claims.
It is important that the EPA concurrently evaluates financial, legal, NEPA, operational, occupancy and other
considerations throughout the EDDP review. For detailed guidance in determining applicability of and project
requirements for EDDP review, refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual and EPA 100-B-00-002, Risk
Characterization Handbook.
3.5 Hazardous Materials Surveys
If hazardous materials are suspected to be present or are encountered during the course of project programming
and design, the Project A/E shall immediately inform the EPA Project Manager, and the EPA Project Manager shall
determine the best course of action at that time. This may include conducting hazardous materials surveys prior to
construction or demolition. If hazardous materials are identified during these surveys, the materials will be abated
using a methodology approved by the EPA Project Manager. Hazardous materials include, but are not limited to,
asbestos, lead-based paint, mold/mildew, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and mercury. Survey, abatement and
material disposal activities must be conducted in accordance with appropriate regulations and industry standards.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 3. Planning and Siting 3-9

-------
This page intentionally left blank.
3-10 Chapter 3. Planning and Siting Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
4. Site Development
Site development design and construction work must comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local
codes, regulations, and ordinances. In addition, site development design shall follow the guidelines prescribed in
GSA PBS-P100. When codes conflict, the most stringent standard shall govern.
4.1	Stormwater Management
The stormwater management design must meet the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings, including
the EPA Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under
Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act.
4.2	Landscaping and Irrigation
4.2.1	General Requirements
The landscaping design process must coincide with the building design process to create a single design that
integrates the site and building(s). All landscaping and site amenities for the project shall be in accordance with all
applicable local, state and federal codes, including:
•	Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings.
•	Guidance for Federal Agencies on Sustainable Practices for Designed Landscapes and its addendum,
Supporting the Health of Honey Bees and Other Pollinators.
If the facility is part of an existing campus or among other buildings in a master-planned development, the
landscape design, as well as building design, must be integrated and compatible with the style(s) of the campus.
Landscaping and site amenities shall comply with any master plan design and construction requirements. The more
stringent requirements shall be used if a conflict exists.
All site landscaping shall be designed by a state-registered landscape architect. This landscape architect must
maintain his or her registration continuously and without break for at least the entire design and construction
process and for the life of the design contract for the project. The landscape architect shall also be proficient in
water-efficient and climate-appropriate landscaping. The landscape architect shall preserve existing trees and
undergrowth, where appropriate, for buffers and review buffer requirements of the local community.
All site landscaping shall be installed and/or modified by a professional landscaper or professional gardener. All
landscaping (plants and grass) except for annuals, if used, shall be guaranteed for 16 months after acceptance by
the EPA.
4.2.2	Irrigation
Irrigation is discouraged at EPA facilities, except for initial irrigation during the period in which new plantings are
being established. Irrigation should be used sparingly and only if necessary. New designs that feature turf grass
requiring regular irrigation are generally prohibited at EPA facilities. Where irrigation is required, systems must
meet the requirements in the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings.
4.3	Hard Surfaces
The selection of hardscape surface materials shall be integrated with the building and landscaping design. Careful
consideration should be applied during site planning and site development design to minimize the total footprint
of impervious land required for roadways, sidewalks, driveways and parking areas. Ultimate material selection
shall be based on permeability, durability under design traffic load, maintainability and cost-effectiveness. In
addition, the following design considerations shall be taken into account:
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 4. Site Development 4-1

-------
•	Structural Performance: The design, testing and construction for pavement shall comply with local and
state highway department standards.
•	Porous Materials: Wherever practical, porous/pervious paving materials shall be used as substitutes for
impervious surfaces. Pervious pavement may substitute for conventional pavement on parking areas,
walkways and areas with light traffic. Pervious pavement is permitted in areas that have gently sloping or
flat ground, have limited heavy truck use, and will not receive snow and ice treatments. In addition, soils
should have permeability rates greater than 0.5 inches per hour, and there should be a 4-foot minimum
clearance from the bottom of the pavement system to bedrock or the water table. Care should be taken
during construction to prevent clogging of porous materials with debris. Porous materials are not
recommended for areas that may be susceptible to chemical spills.
•	Recycled Content: The use of recycled content in hardscape surfaces is encouraged.
•	Heat Island Mitigation: The use of materials that reduce the heat island effect is encouraged.
4.4	Traffic Control
Vehicle circulation for roadways, loading and unloading areas, parking areas, emergency vehicle access, pedestrian
walkways and bicycle access shall be designed in accordance with applicable national, state and local code
requirements and with any overall campus master plan in effect at the project site.
4.5	Electric Vehicle Infrastructure
The site design shall meet the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings requirements for electric vehicle
charging infrastructure.
4.6	Site Utilities
The site planning investigations and surveys shall determine the availability and location of existing and available
utilities such as water, wastewater, electricity, natural gas and telecommunications. The conditions of all existing
and available site utilities shall be reviewed to determine their adequacy as it pertains to requirements imposed by
a new or upgraded EPA facility. Refer to Section 7.8, Energy and Water Metering, within these A&E Guidelines for
additional information about energy and water utility metering.
While the Project A/E is not authorized to make any commitments or negotiate contracts with the local utility
service companies or municipal authorities, the Project A/E may be responsible for contacting the local utility
service providers to determine such information as interest in providing service to the EPA facility, proposed rate
structures and system capacities. Refer to GSA PBS-P100 for additional guidelines on utility coordination.
If any onsite or offsite utilities require adjustments to facilitate service for the project, the Project A/E shall furnish
recommendations, including load requirements, service characteristics, cost analysis, schematic drawings and
various alternatives, for each utility service.
When designing site utility systems, size and terminate utilities to accommodate possible future extensions. If
expansion is planned, extend utilities to the edge of the site or to a point where a connection can be made without
damage or disruption to the utility or adjacent structures. For utilities that can share corridors and piping, establish
shared utility corridors to optimize land use and provide adequate utility separation. Ensure that aboveground
utility elements such as transformers, generators and backflow prevention devices are located with convenient
service access and are integrated with the building and site design.
Except for dense urban areas, where there is no feasible alternative, new buildings and structures should not be
placed over existing sanitary sewer, water supply, stormwater drainage, electrical or natural gas lines.
Utilities systems shall be located at least 50 feet from loading docks, front entrances and parking areas. Access to
utility areas shall be restricted to authorized personnel.
4-2 Chapter 4. Site Development Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
4.6.1 Water Supply
Potable Water
During design and construction planning, the potable water supply and local/municipal water authority shall be
determined. Facilities that obtain drinking water from municipal sources have limited responsibilities for
monitoring drinking water, except during initial construction or leasing. Drinking water in all newly constructed
facilities must be tested to confirm compliance with the National Primary Drinking Water Regulations to ensure
they do not exceed drinking water action levels. Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual for
sampling requirements.
The design of potable water supply connections shall be coordinated with plumbing design, as detailed in Section
7.7, Plumbing and Piping, within these A&E Guidelines, and shall comply with codes and requirements of the local
public water authority. Refer to GSA PBS-P100 for additional guidance on potable water and plumbing utility
design and coordination.
Potable water distribution systems shall be included within the utility master plan and shall be metered (refer to
Section 7.8, Energy and Water Metering, within these A&E Guidelines for additional guidance).
The use of dual water systems (i.e., domestic and industrial or irrigation) or municipal graywater shall be
considered but is subject to the approval of the EPA Project Manager. Where use of dual water systems is
approved, the location and alignment of both systems must be clearly identified on the record drawings and by
location markers at intervals specified by the EPA Project Manager.
The planning and routing of the piping system and access points must be determined early in the design process.
Water lines shall not be located under foundations and other areas where access is severely limited. During route
selection and initial planning for potable water distribution systems, the following conditions and requirements
shall be considered:
•	Projections concerning future population and development.
•	Anticipated average daily flow for fully developed conditions.
•	Anticipated peak flows for domestic, industrial, fire and special water usage.
•	Hydraulic design criteria.
•	Health and safety requirements.
•	Physical constraints (e.g., utility corridors, topographic features).
•	Energy conservation and environmental constraints.
Distribution system layouts shall be as simple and direct as possible. Where feasible, initial planning efforts shall
optimize system layouts (e.g., system loop lines) in order to:
•	Facilitate future system expansion.
•	Minimize conflicts with other utilities.
•	Reduce maintenance requirements.
Water service meters shall be located inside the building to maintain security and supervision within the security
perimeter.
Backflow preventers must be installed on all connections to public or private water supply systems, as specified in
Section 7.7.1, Water Supply Systems, within these A&E Guidelines.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 4. Site Development 4-3

-------
4.6.2 Wells
Drinking Water
Where drinking water is derived from onsite wells and is provided to more than 25 individuals or 15 service
connections for at least 60 days out of the year, facilities must comply with the requirements for "public drinking
water systems" under the Safe Drinking Water Act. These systems are subject to periodic monitoring for physical,
chemical, radiological and biological parameters as specified in 40 CFR 141 and 40 CFR 143. Facilities that obtain
drinking water from onsite wells shall also be designed with sufficient pretreatment capabilities to ensure the
safety and aesthetic quality of the water for general consumption. At a minimum, pretreatment systems for water
obtained from onsite sources shall provide levels of performance that ensure fulfillment of the primary maximum
contaminant levels in 40 CFR 141, the lead and copper action levels in 40 CFR 141.80, and the secondary maximum
contaminant levels in 40 CFR 143.
Research Purposes
Where and when water must be provided for fish culture, onsite drilled wells shall be capable of producing a
minimum of 20 gallons of water (of consistent quality) per minute, unless otherwise specified by the EPA Project
Manager. The water must be of a suitable quality for rearing and maintaining fish cultures. It must not be
contaminated with pesticides, heavy metals, sulfides, silica or chlorides. The anions should be those found in
natural lakes or streams. Water quality parameters should be as follows:
•	Dissolved Oxygen: > 6.0 milligrams per liter (mg/L).
•	pH: 7.2-8.5.
•	Hardness: 40-200 mg/L as calcium carbonate (CaC03).
•	Alkalinity: Slightly less than hardness.
•	Iron: < 1.0 mg/L.
•	Chlorides: < 250 mg/L as chlorides and sulfates.
•	Sulfides: < 2.0 micrograms per liter (|ag/L) as undissociated H2S.
The well and pump shall be protected from the elements. Two 500-gallon water tanks shall be installed as
reservoirs for water prior to distribution.
4.6.3 Sanitary Sewer
General
The design of sanitary sewer connections shall be coordinated with the facility sanitary sewer design, as detailed in
Section 7.7, Plumbing and Piping, within these A&E Guidelines and shall comply with codes and requirements of
the local POTW. Refer to GSA PBS-P100 for additional guidance.
This subsection applies to sanitary wastewater collection systems (i.e., lift stations, force mains, collector sewers,
interceptor sewers and building sewers 5 feet beyond the building foundation). The following elements shall be
considered during wastewater system design:
•	Gray water reuse systems shall be implemented where cost-effective and permitted under local laws and
regulations.
•	Industrial wastewater and pollutants above the minimum concentrations specified by the EPA shall be
excluded from sanitary wastewater collection systems.
•	Pretreatment systems (e.g., acid neutralization) shall be installed where required and shall meet EPA
specifications and/or requirements of the POTW and NPDES as applicable.
4-4 Chapter 4. Site Development Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
4.6.4	Natural Gas Supply
Gas distribution connections shall comply with federal, state, and local codes and requirements. Natural gas and
other liquid fuel gas systems shall comply with NFPA 54/American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z223.1,
National Fuel Gas Code. Refer to Section 7.8, Energy and Water Metering, within these A&E Guidelines for
additional information about required natural gas metering.
Natural gas piping shall not be run in trenches or other confined/unventilated spaces where leaking gas might
collect and cause an explosion or in areas subject to fires. Natural gas piping shall not share the same trench or
corridor with other utilities. The minimum horizontal clearance between a natural gas pipe and parallel utility pipe
shall be 2 feet. Do not locate gas piping through other underground structures such as vaults, manholes or similar
underground structures. When connecting to existing live gas mains, connections shall be made in accordance with
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B31.8, Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
Natural gas service utility piping entering the building shall be protected from damage by vehicles, foundation
settlement and vibration impacts. Where wall penetration above grade is not possible, the gas pipe shall be within
a Schedule 80 black steel, corrosion-protected, sealed and vented, gas pipe sleeve that extends from 10 feet
upstream of the building wall penetration exterior (or excavation shoring limits if greater) to 12 inches
downstream of the building wall penetration.
4.6.5	Steam From District Energy Systems
The use of district energy systems to pipe steam to EPA facilities for thermal energy purposes shall be evaluated on
a site-specific basis. For project sites that can be connected to a district energy system, the Project A/E shall
coordinate with the energy source owner/operator to determine capacity and design requirements for the
connections and system. If an EPA facility receives steam from a district energy system, this steam must be
metered. Refer to Section 7.8, Energy and Water Metering, within these A&E Guidelines for additional information.
4.6.6	Electrical Power
Electrical power connections shall be coordinated with the electrical power design, as detailed in Chapter 8,
Electrical Requirements, within these A&E Guidelines and shall comply with NFPA 70, as well as local codes and
requirements. Refer to GSA PBS-P100 for additional guidance.
General requirements for electrical power include the following:
•	A detailed load study, including connected loads and anticipated maximum demand loads, as well as the
estimated size of the largest motor, shall be performed to determine the required capacity of the new
electrical service. If the project is a renovation or an extension of an existing building, the history of the
loads shall be carefully studied to ensure that the existing service entrance equipment has sufficient
capacity to handle the loads of the addition or renovation and has spare capacity for future loads.
•	The service entrance location for commercial or municipal electrical power shall be determined
concurrently with the development of conceptual design space planning documents, and standards for
equipment furnished by utility companies shall be incorporated into the concept design. Locations of
transformers, vaults, meters and other utility items must be coordinated with the architectural design and
must consider both equipment ventilation and equipment removal.
•	The routing of electrical power and other site utilities, as well as the location of manholes and other
access points, must be determined early in the design process, in coordination with the responsible site
civil engineer.
•	Cable selection shall be based on all aspects of cable operation and the installation environment,
including corrosion, ambient heat, rodent attack, pulling tensions and seismic activity.
•	On multi-building EPA campuses, electrical power shall be metered at the individual building level. Refer
to Section 7.8, Energy and Water Metering, within these A&E Guidelines for additional information.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 4. Site Development 4-5

-------
Overhead Services
Overhead services to buildings shall not be used, except in circumstances where underground services are not
feasible. Where electrical service to the building is by overhead lines, proper dip poles, weatherheads and supports
shall be provided. The main service switch, panelboard or switchboard shall be located immediately adjacent to
the entrance of feeders into the building. Code-required clearances shall be maintained under all overhead lines.
The openings necessary for bringing conductors into buildings shall be grouted or otherwise fire-stopped.
Underground Services
All underground secondary conductors (i.e., voltage less than 600 volts) shall be installed in direct buried conduits.
Where secondary-service reliability is a prime consideration, secondary service ductbanks shall be concrete
encased.
The minimum duct size of service entrance ducts shall be 4 inches. All other secondary conduits that might be
necessary for power distribution to exterior lighting and other electrical loads shall be sized based on conduit fill as
calculated in accordance with NFPA 70.
A minimum of 25 percent spare service entrance ducts (but not less than one spare duct) shall be provided. Spare
ducts shall be plugged or capped to prevent contamination. Ensure conduits are watertight to 3 feet above the
base flood elevation or the local design flood elevation, whichever is higher. The locations where manholes (if
required) are to be included shall be investigated to ensure that they will drain properly.
Service Capacity
Incoming transformers must be provided, as required, and must be of sufficient capacity to accommodate the full
design load, plus 30 percent additional capacity for future growth. To the greatest extent possible, public utility
transformers shall be located outside of the actual building. If public utility transformers must be located within
buildings because of site constraints, they shall be installed in standard transformer vaults conforming to NFPA 70
requirements. These vaults shall not be located adjacent to, or directly beneath, any exit from the building. In
calculating the design load, a demand factor of 100 percent should be used for lighting and fixed mechanical
equipment loads, and a demand factor of 75 percent should be used for all other loads.
Service Entrance Equipment
Service entrance equipment shall consist of a main switch or switches, a main circuit breaker or circuit breakers, or
a main switchboard or panelboard. In determining whether the service entrance equipment should be of the fused
or circuit breaker type, careful consideration shall be given to the short-circuit current available at various points in
the proposed distribution system.
4.6.7 Telecommunications, Audio, Video and Data Transmission
The system shall adhere to local code requirements and NFPA 70. Telecommunications utility systems may include
telephone, audio, video and data cabling systems that are provided by local service companies (e.g., digital cable,
internet providers). An effective communications cabling system encompasses copper and fiber optic entrance
cables, termination equipment, backbone cables, horizontal distribution cables and workstation outlets.
The Project A/E shall coordinate with the local telecommunications company to determine the size, capacity and
location of the incoming service, as well as the enclosure and pathway requirements, for a new system at the
facility. Cable selection shall be based on all aspects of cable operation and the installation environment, including
corrosion, ambient heat, rodent attack, pulling tensions and seismic activity.
Cable television service shall also be provided to the facility.
4.7 Exterior Site Lighting
Exterior site lighting shall be designed to enhance safety and security onsite, provide adequate lighting for
nighttime activities, and highlight any special site features. While exterior site lighting shall maintain safe light
4-6 Chapter 4. Site Development Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
levels, site lighting shall also be designed to minimize light trespass onto surrounding properties, particularly if
there are adjoining residential areas, in order to minimize and mitigate night sky pollution. Lighting from the
perimeter into the site is preferred. The maintained level of illumination shall adhere to relevant codes,
GSA PBS-P100 and other federal requirements. The same type of lighting that is used for parking lots shall be used
for roadways and should be consistent in color and height. Energy-efficient, low-voltage or solar-powered lighting
shall be used (i.e., ENERGY STAR or FEMP-designated products, as required by Section 104 of EPAct 2005). The
lighting level standards recommended by the Illuminating Engineering Society's Subcommittee on Off-Roadway
Facilities are the lowest acceptable lighting levels for an EPA parking facility.
Refer to Section 8.6, Lighting Systems, within these A&E Guidelines for additional requirements for site lighting.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 4. Site Development 4-7

-------
This page intentionally left blank.
4-8 Chapter 4. Site Development Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements
5.1	Historic Preservation
For work involving historic properties, structures or landscapes, the Project A/E must meet historic preservation
requirements including, but not limited to, the following:
•	The Secretary of the Interior's Standards and Guidelines for Archeology and Historic Preservation (as
amended and annotated by the National Park Service [NPS]).
•	The Secretary of the Interior's Historic Preservation Professional Qualification Standards.
•	36 CFR 68, The Secretary of the Interior's Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties.
•	Executive Order (EO) 11593, Protection and Enhancement of the Cultural Environment.
•	EO 13006, Locating Federal Agencies in Historic Buildings in Historic Districts in Our Central Cities.
•	EO 13287, Preserve America.
•	36 CFR 800, Protection of Historic Properties.
•	Cultural Resource Management Guideline, NPS-28.
•	Guidelines for Federal Agency Responsibilities, under the National Historic Preservation Act Section 110.
•	Archaeological Resources Protection Act.
•	Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act.
5.1.1 Alterations in Historic Structures
Where a historic structure is to be altered, special documents will be provided by the EPA to help guide the design
of the alterations. The most important of these is the Building Preservation Plan, which identifies zones of
architectural importance, specific character-defining elements that shall be preserved and standards to be
employed. Early and frequent coordination between the architect, EPA Federal Preservation Officer, State Historic
Preservation Office, Regional Historic Preservation Office, preservation specialists, external review groups and
other appropriate EPA specialists is imperative to timely resolution of conflicts between renovation and
preservation goals.
In general, alterations in historically significant spaces shall be designed contextually to blend with the original
materials, finishes and detailing. When substantial repairs or alterations are undertaken in significant and highly
visible locations, opportunities shall be sought to restore original features that have been removed or insensitively
altered.
Alterations to historic preservation must comply with the requirements of the Architectural Barriers Act
Accessibility Standard (ABAAS) Section F202.5, Alterations to Qualified Historic Buildings and Facilities.
5.2	Sustainability
With respect to architecture and the building envelope, the Project A/E's design must meet the Guiding Principles
for Sustainable Federal Buildings, including requirements for energy efficiency, daylighting, environmentally
preferable materials, occupant health and wellness (e.g., active design, exterior views), and climate resiliency.
5.3	Building Envelope
The building envelope shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC)/lnternational Energy Conservation
Code (IECC) for the associated climate zone. Where required, glazing shall also conform with the UFC for physical
security design. In some instances, the Project A/E may be required to conduct hygrothermal analysis in
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements 5-1

-------
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 160 to demonstrate that the building envelope performance reduces the risk of
moisture damage. Fenestration air leakage shall comply with the IBC/IECC.
•	Waterproofing and Flashing: All drainage planes, cavities and through-wall penetrations shall maintain
continuity of drainage with approved flashing materials at all head conditions, as well as all jambs and sills
(with dam ends). Sealant alone is not an acceptable means of waterproofing. All metal copings and
flashings shall conform to SMACNA construction technical standard manuals.
•	Thermal Barrier: The building envelope shall include a continuous layer of insulation, in addition to cavity
insulation (where cavities exist), consistent with IECC requirements. The Project A/E may be required to
provide thermal resistive (R) values for each envelope assembly (including floor slabs) in order to meet
sustainability goals and compliance with code. Inert, non-combustible insulating materials are preferred.
•	Air Barrier: A continuous air barrier is required. Air infiltration rates for air barrier systems must conform
to IBC/IECC requirements. The Project A/E may be required to identify the air barrier within the assembly
and be prepared to justify barrier system location.
•	Vapor Barrier (Retarders): Vapor retarders shall be included in all envelope assemblies. A vapor retarder
can also function as an air barrier, provided the air barrier is continuous, sealed and is vapor-permeable at
rates conforming to the IBC/IECC. Vapor barriers are required at roofs and slabs. Hygrothermal analysis
may be required to justify combining air and vapor barrier systems. Climatic conditions may also be
considered when selecting a vapor retarder.
5.4	Ceilings
Suspended acoustical ceilings shall have a noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of not less than 0.65 in private offices
and conference rooms and 0.75 in open offices, in accordance with ASTM C423. Private offices, conference rooms,
and open offices using acoustical cloud or acoustical wall panels with a minimum of 70 percent coverage shall have
an NRC of not less than 0.85. Open ceilings are acceptable if noise reduction is considered and the EPA's minimum
requirements for noise control (as specified by the EPA Project Manager) are achieved.
Acoustical ceiling tile must meet the California Department of Public Health Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, have a
minimum of 30 percent recycled content and have a minimum light reflectance value of 0.85.
5.5	Acoustical Requirements
When separated from adjacent spaces by ceiling high partitions (not including doors), conference rooms shall have
a minimum noise isolation class (NIC) of 40 and offices shall have a minimum NIC of 35, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E336.
5.6	Doors
5.6.1 Laboratory Doors
Laboratory doors shall be 48 inches wide (36 inches wide for the active leaf and 12 inches wide for the inactive
leaf) and 84 inches high to facilitate easy movement of equipment and carts. Laboratory doors shall swing in the
direction of egress from the laboratory and shall be inserted in alcoves, regardless of the corridor width. Open
doors shall not protrude more than 6 inches into exit access corridors. In general, vision panels shall be provided to
allow easy and quick safety inspection of laboratory spaces. Hardware shall be ABAAS-compliant and shall provide
access control, as required.
Laboratory doors are considered high-use doors. All hardware shall be specified to withstand this type of use.
Light, commercial grade hardware shall not be specified. All hardware must meet security, accessibility and life
safety requirements. Doors shall be fitted with kick plates.
5-2 Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
5.7 Flooring
Carpet shall meet the following requirements: adhere to NSF/ANSI 140, Sustainability Assessment for Carpet, Gold
certification; contain a minimum of 10 percent post-consumer recycled content; and have Green Label Plus
certification. Other flooring shall meet the following: Cradle to Cradle Certified Product Standard; NSF/ANSI 332,
Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Floor Coverings; or ANSI A138.1, Green Squared American National Standard
Specifications for Sustainable Ceramic Tiles, Glass Tiles, and Tile Installation Materials, where applicable. In
addition, products shall meet the California Department of Public Health Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.
5.8 Building Support Areas
5.8.1 Loading Dock/Staging Facilities
Appropriate loading dock/staging facilities are required relative to the facility's size, function and material
requirements. Loading docks must be easily accessible by service vehicles, be separated from the main public
entrances to the building, be separated from parking access, and be convenient to freight elevators so that service
traffic is segregated from the main passenger elevator lobbies and public corridors. Where possible, a one-way
design for service traffic to loading and unloading areas is recommended to avoid the need for truck turning areas.
The following minimum requirements shall be applied for loading docks and berths:
•	Loading docks must accommodate the vehicles used to deliver or pick up materials from the building. If
the bed height of vans and trucks varies more than 18 inches, at least one loading berth must be
equipped with a dock leveler. The dock shall be protected with edge guards and dock bumpers. Open
loading docks shall be covered at least 4 feet beyond the edge of the platform over the loading berth. In
cold climates, dock seals shall be used at each loading bay. Alternatively, consideration could be given to
enclosing the entire loading bay. Separate or dedicated loading docks should be considered for food
service areas. A ramp shall be provided from the loading dock down to the truck parking area to facilitate
deliveries from small trucks and vans. This ramp shall have a maximum slope of 1:12 and comply with
ABAAS guidelines, ensuring that deliveries on carts and dollies are maneuverable. If the building size
warrants, a dock manager's room or booth should be located so the manager can keep the entire dock
area in view and control the entrance and exit from the building. Loading docks must not be used as
emergency egress paths from the building.
•	The design shall provide at least one off-street berth for loading and unloading. The berth shall be 15 feet
wide and at least the length of the longest vehicle to be accommodated. Local zoning regulations or the
POR may require a longer length. The space should be located adjacent to the loading dock. If additional
loading berths are required, they need not be wider than 12 feet, if they are contiguous to the 15-foot-
wide berth. An apron space shall be provided in front of the loading berth for vehicle maneuvering equal
to the length of the berth plus 2 feet. This area should be flat with a minimum slope of 1:50 for drainage.
The minimum headroom in the loading berth and apron space is 15 feet. When a steeper slope is required
in the apron area, the headroom should increase with a gradient allowance to allow trucks to traverse the
grade change. If the approach to the loading dock is ramped, the design should permit easy snow
removal.
•	Fire sprinkler protection in the loading dock area shall be provided in accordance with local and national
codes. Additional fire protection specifications are provided in Chapter 10, Fire Protection, within these
A&E Guidelines.
•	A weather-protected staging area shall be provided inside the building and adjacent to the loading dock.
The staging area shall not interfere with emergency egress from the building.
•	The loading dock area shall be considered for video monitoring for security purposes.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements 5-3

-------
• The staging and loading area shall include sufficient space for collection and storage of recyclables,
compostable material and waste. This space shall be accessible to recycling, compost and waste collection
vehicles. See Section 5.8.13, Waste and Recycling Collection/Storage/Staging Areas, below.
5.8.2	Hazardous Materials/Waste Storage Facility
For laboratory facilities, an appropriately sized, isolated hazardous materials/waste storage facility shall be located
near the loading dock to facilitate storage and handling of explosive/flammable materials, toxic chemicals, and
bio-hazardous waste before transportation and disposal at an offsite location by a licensed contractor. This facility
shall be provided with an automatic fire suppression system.
5.8.3	Restrooms
Separate restrooms for men and women shall be provided. The restrooms must be located so that employees will
not have to travel more than 150 feet to reach one. Where determined by the EPA Project Manager, men's and
women's locker rooms with restrooms, shower stalls and adequate lockers can be provided to encourage staff to
bike or walk to work.
Restrooms must conform to ABAAS requirements. All public restrooms shall be located along an accessible path of
travel, but not in any non-secure areas. Restrooms also shall not be situated adjacent to the queuing/security
screening area at the public entrances.
The number of water closets, urinals and lavatories shall comply with all state and local codes and with project
criteria. If a conflict exists between the project criteria and the state and local codes, the more stringent shall
apply.
5.8.4	Janitor Closets/Custodial Space
Janitor closets shall be provided in appropriate locations to service the various areas of the building(s). Each floor
or block shall have at least one janitor closet with a mop sink and an area to house all necessary supplies. These
rooms shall be exhausted to the exterior. Additional custodial space may be necessary for storage of cleaning
equipment and supplies.
5.8.5	Equipment Spaces
Mechanical and electrical equipment rooms must be designed with adequate aisle space and clearances around
equipment to accommodate maintenance and replacement. Housekeeping pads are required for all floor-mounted
equipment. Equipment placement shall allow for the maintenance and removal of motors, coils, other mechanical
equipment and filters from the ground. When there is no practicable alternative and equipment must be placed
overhead, equipment shall be located such that filter replacement can be safely completed by one person using a
standard step ladder. Accommodations for hoists, rails and fasteners for chains shall be provided to facilitate
removal of heavy equipment.
Mechanical rooms shall have at least 12 feet of height clearance. All mechanical rooms must be accessible via a
freight elevator for O&M and equipment replacement purposes. The freight elevator must be sized to
accommodate the largest equipment component. Ship ladders are not permitted as a means of access to
mechanical equipment. Mechanical rooms should open from non-occupied spaces such as corridors. If mechanical
rooms must open from occupied spaces because of configuration constraints, consider incorporating a vestibule
with partitions that extend to the nearest structural walls, with sound/smoke-gasketed doors at each side for
acoustic and vibration separation. All equipment spaces must be designed to control noise transmission to
adjacent spaces. Refer to Section 7.1.8, Mechanical Rooms, within these A&E Guidelines for additional mechanical
room requirements.
The main electrical switchgear shall not be below restrooms or janitor closets, or at an elevation that requires
sump pumps for drainage. If electrical switchgear is housed in the basement, provisions shall be made to prevent
water from flooding the electrical room in the event of a pipe breaking or flood. Automatic sprinkler piping shall
not be installed directly over switchgear equipment.
5-4 Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
In areas susceptible to flooding, locate or elevate mechanical and electrical equipment above the local design flood
elevation or 3 feet above the base flood elevation (whichever is higher) to protect it from damage during flooding.
Consider implementing additional protective measures, such as permanent floodwalls, if necessary.
Walls and ceilings of equipment rooms shall be gypsum board, concrete masonry surfaces or other durable
surfaces; exposed batt or other forms of insulation shall not be used as wall surfaces. Walls in these areas shall be
painted. Floors in mechanical rooms shall be waterproofed. Floors in electrical rooms shall be painted or sealed.
Requirements for telecommunications spaces are detailed in Section 8.8, Telecommunications Systems and
Spaces.
5.8.6	Maintenance Shops
Shop facilities shall be located with exterior access appropriate to their function. The shop facilities shall be
remotely located away from areas sensitive to vibration, noise and dust. Walls and ceilings of all equipment and
maintenance shops shall be gypsum board, concrete masonry surfaces or other durable surfaces; exposed batt or
other forms of insulation shall not be used at wall surfaces. Walls in these areas shall be painted. Floors in
maintenance shops shall be waterproofed.
5.8.7	Chemical Storage Areas
Chemical storage shall be provided and comply with the requirements of the EPA Environmental Management
Manual and the EPA Safety Manual. Below are some general guidelines:
•	Only authorized personnel will be permitted entry into limited access or exclusion areas where chemicals
are housed. Control procedures shall assure positive identification of all personnel prior to entry.
•	Doors used for main access to chemical agent storage structures shall be locked with two high-security
locks. Each high-security lock shall be mounted on a high-security, shrouded hasp.
•	All doors, locks and openings (in excess of 96 square inches) shall be monitored by IDS.
•	Perimeter lighting shall be positioned and designated to enable the detection of persons in the entire
clear zone, inside the inner perimeter fence, between the fences and outside the outer perimeter fence.
•	Lighting fixtures shall be positioned to avoid blinding of guards from glare and silhouetting.
•	Fresh air intakes shall be provided in conformance with Section 7.3.3, Location of Air Intake(s), within
these A&E Guidelines.
5.8.8	General Storage Areas
General storage is usually required on every floor. Adequate storage space must be included in the design. Design
considerations include:
•	Locate storage internal to the building.
•	Ensure good access to service elevator(s).
•	Size rooms with freezers or other bulky equipment relative to equipment dimensions and layout.
•	Check corridor and elevator dimensions for movement of equipment.
•	Determine PACS requirements based on the program(s) being served.
5.8.9	Libraries
Onsite libraries shall be located with suitable access to storage, service elevator(s) and conference facilities. Design
considerations include:
•	Type of library storage.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements 5-5

-------
•	Number of computer terminals/study carrels required.
•	Amount of work space required.
•	Floor loading/structural requirements.
The Project A/E shall verify library requirements with the EPA Project Manager prior to beginning design.
5.8.10	Records Storage Facilities and Areas
Records storage facilities and areas shall be designed in accordance with 36 CFR 1234.
5.8.11	Bicycle Storage Facilities
Secure and covered bicycle parking should be provided at each facility. Bicycle parking areas should be in a highly
visible and illuminated location, be as close as possible to the main facility entrance(s) and have easy access to
shower facilities.
5.8.12	Shower/Locker Rooms
Locker rooms shall be finished spaces with shower areas separate from the locker areas. Wet locations require all
finish material to be installed in conjunction with approved masonry or cementitious backer unit board. Locker
rooms shall be provided with resilient flooring and water-resistant wall covering, except in "wet" areas, which shall
be finished similar to general use toilets (e.g., ceramic tile floor and walls). See Section 7.7.3, Water Fixtures and
Fittings, for shower requirements.
5.8.13	Waste and Recycling Collection/Storage/Staging Areas
Management of hazardous waste shall comply with Subtitle C of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
(RCRA). Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual. Management of non-hazardous solid waste shall
comply with Subtitle D of RCRA.
The building design shall incorporate adequate space and containers for the collection, storage, and staging of
solid waste, recyclable, compostable (where markets exist), and reusable materials generated during building
occupancy. Containers may be combined as appropriate where commingled recycling markets exist. The following
recyclables (at a minimum) will be collected: mixed paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, metals, plastics, batteries,
toner cartridges and "technotrash." The design shall include storage areas for reusable items as needed by the
facility (e.g., office supplies, packaging materials, laboratory supplies).
Building corridors, elevators, trash rooms, and/or loading docks shall accommodate collection hampers and
containers for aggregating, moving, and temporarily storing solid waste, recyclable, and compostable materials.
The loading dock shall accommodate the installation and operation of a compactor(s) as needed for the solid
waste and recycling program.
5.9 Laboratory Biosafety Architectural Requirements
The EPA has facilities with up to Biosafety Level 3 (BSL-3) capabilities (defined below). BSL-3 facilities shall be
constructed in accordance with the National Institutes of Health (NIH) Design Requirements Manual and operated
in accordance with the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), including the guidelines in the CDC/NIH
Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories.
BSL-3 facility design and construction are applicable to clinical, diagnostic, teaching, research or production
facilities in which work is done with indigenous or exotic agents that may cause serious or potentially lethal disease
through inhalation.
Mycobacterium tuberculosis, St. Louis encephalitis virus and Coxiella burnetii are representative of the
microorganism assigned to this level. Primary hazards to personnel working with these agents relate to auto-
inoculation, ingestion and/or exposure to infectious aerosols.
5-6 Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
At BSL-3, more emphasis is placed on primary and secondary barriers (compared with BSL-1 and BSL-2) to protect
personnel in contiguous areas, the community and the environment from exposure to potentially infectious
aerosols. For example, all laboratory manipulations shall be performed in a biological safety cabinet or other
enclosed equipment such as a gas-tight aerosol generation chamber. Secondary barriers for this level include
controlled access to the laboratory and ventilation requirements that minimize the release of infectious aerosols
from the laboratory.
5.10 Deconstruction and End-of-Life Structure Management
The facility design should incorporate end-of-life waste prevention strategies for future rebuilds or demolition such
as using modular components; designing to standard material sizes; considering prefabricated components;
specifying mock-ups for tricky, repetitive details; planning for anticipated changes; and material recycling of any
construction/demolition waste.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements 5-7

-------
This page intentionally left blank.
5-8 Chapter 5. Architectural and Building Envelope Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
6. Structural Requirements
This chapter applies to the structural elements of buildings and other incidental structures. The structural
elements include, but are not limited to, the following:
•	All buildings and building systems constructed of concrete, masonry, steel, wood or other suitable
materials.
•	All other substructures and superstructure elements that are proportioned on the basis of stress, strength
and deflection requirements.
6.1	Design Personnel Qualifications
The person with overall responsibility for the final structural design shall be a registered Professional Engineer in
the state where the project will be completed, and all final design drawings shall be sealed by a registered
Professional Engineer. Structural engineers shall have a certified Structural Engineer license when required; refer
to the requirements of the state in which the project will be completed to determine if a Structural Engineer is
required.
6.2	Seismic Design
All buildings shall meet, at minimum, all requirements laid forth in:
•	IBC.
•	N 1ST Standards of Seismic Safety for Existing Federally Owned and Leased Buildings: Interagency
Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction (ICSSC) Recommended Practice 8.
•	National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended Seismic Provisions for New
Buildings and Other Structures.
•	For existing buildings, ASCE/SEI 41, Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings.
Refer to Section 3.2.2, Geotechnical/Subsurface Investigation, within these A&E Guidelines for information on
evaluating seismic activity at a particular location.
6.2.1 Seismic Instrumentation for Buildings
New and existing buildings located in regions of high seismicity, greater than six stories in height, and having an
aggregate floor area of 60,000 square feet or greater (and every building located in Regions of High Seismicity over
10 stories in height regardless of floor area) shall be have U.S. Geological Survey (USGS)-approved recording
accelerographs. The USGS has developed guidelines and a guide specification for the seismic instrumentation of
federal buildings. (Refer to M. Celebi, Seismic Instrumentation of Buildings, USGS Open-File Report 00-157, April
2000.)
6.3	Floor Loading
The Project A/E shall submit to the EPA Project Manager plans and specifications that show the floor load capacity
and are signed and stamped by a registered Professional Engineer (civil or structural specialization). Backup
calculations and drawings may also be required to be submitted, on a case-by-case basis.
Floors shall have minimum live load capacities as follows:
•	Office Areas: Regular office areas shall meet the floor loading capacity as dictated by the regulating code.
•	Laboratory Areas: The floor shall have a minimum live load capacity of 150 pounds per square foot (lb/ft2)
in both laboratory modules and laboratory storage and receiving areas.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 6. Structural Requirements 6-1

-------
•	Records Storage, Library and High-Density Filing Areas: Records storage, library and high-density filing
areas shall have a minimum live load capacity of 200 lb/ft2, unless otherwise indicated in the POR.
•	Basements or Lower Levels: A percentage of the square footage in basements or lower levels shall have a
minimum live load capacity of 200 lb/ft2. This percentage will be specified by the EPA Project Manager for
each project.
6.4 Records Storage Facilities and Areas
Records storage facilities and areas shall be designed in accordance with 36 CFR 1234.
6-2 Chapter 6. Structural Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
7. Mechanical Requirements
7.1 Mechanical Systems Design Criteria
Building mechanical systems and subsystems shall be evaluated, and major equipment components shall be
selected, taking into consideration federal, state and local regulations and codes; other health, safety and
sustainability requirements and executive orders; occupant comfort; attributed atmospheric emissions of
regulated air pollutants; and capital, O&M and life cycle costs.
LCCAs shall be performed using NIST Handbook 135, Life Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management
Program, to select the most cost-effective system(s) and components. (Refer to Section 1.5, Life Cycle Cost
Analyses, within these A&E Guidelines for additional information on conducting LCCAs.)
The following procedures for selection and design of mechanical systems shall be used:
•	Ensure that passive design features (e.g., building orientation, shading, building envelope construction,
daylighting) are optimized to reduce heating and cooling loads. These passive techniques reduce the
requirement to use complex, maintenance-intensive HVAC systems and equipment, thus reducing both
energy usage and life cycle costs.
•	Design mechanical systems with special emphasis on simplifying controls, operations and maintenance. In
general, the least complex of the technically feasible and cost-effective alternatives should be selected
based on functional requirements, ease of maintenance and the design energy budget. In other words, a
system requiring extensive use of complex systems and controls should only be considered when there
are no practical alternatives to obtain the design energy budget.
•	Consider available resources utilized to maintain mechanical systems when selecting the system design
and capabilities. The facility staff shall be trained to understand the operating principles, control logic and
maintenance of the system. The EPA Project Manager may specify that the equipment supplier provide
additional training for facility O&M staff. During the design phase, the Project A/E must ensure that
adequate space will be provided for equipment maintenance and removal/replacement.
7.1.1 Energy Efficiency
For new construction and major renovations, the design shall meet or exceed ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and the
energy performance level required by the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings; 10 CFR 433 (as
required for new construction); and any other federal, state or local mandates.
Section 104 of EPAct 2005 also requires that, when procuring energy-consuming products, all federal agencies
procure either ENERGY STAR1 or FEMP-designated products2 (product requirements under both programs can be
found at: http://energv.gov/eere/femp/find-product-categories-covered-efficiencv-programs), unless it can be
demonstrated that:
•	Equipment meeting the requirements of ENERGY STAR or FEMP is not "reasonably available"; and/or
•	Equipment meeting the requirement is available, but purchase of that equipment would not be life cycle
cost-effective.
1
ENERGY STAR is a program jointly established by the EPA and the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE). It certifies a variety of products
applicable to residential and commercial buildings that meet EPA/DOE criteria for energy efficiency and reduced energy consumption.
p
EPAct 2005 requires the use of ENERGY STAR or FEMP-designated products and equipment. Most of the energy efficiency specifications for
mechanical equipment that EPA would install in one of its buildings have been developed by FEMP. For each type of equipment, FEMP
establishes minimum energy efficiency thresholds based on key operating characteristics or parameters. In most cases, the guidelines are for
a range of products and include specific targets.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-1

-------
7.1.2	Computational Fluid Dynamics Modeling
Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) models shall be considered for predicting indoor air quality parameters in
spaces with complex airflow regimes and/or potentially hazardous conditions. For the EPA, the most likely
application will be modeling airflows, contaminant concentrations, and other factors that influence the selection
and design of fume hoods and laboratory ventilation systems.
7.1.3	Wind/Air Flow Modeling
When requested by the EPA, a study shall be conducted to determine the location and design of fresh air intakes,
exhaust stacks and emergency generator exhaust to avoid adverse air quality impacts. The study shall utilize
recognized wind modeling techniques, such as the EPA's Industrial Source Complex Model (ISC3) and the Briggs
Plume Rise Equations, and the design criteria of the ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals and the ASHRAE
Handbook—HVAC Applications, as applicable. In addition, the study shall take into consideration the
recommendations of the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Industrial
Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice for Design, as applicable.
7.1.4	Outdoor Design Conditions
Outdoor air design criteria shall be based on weather data tabulated in the ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals.
The Project A/E shall verify outdoor design conditions with the EPA Project Manager.
7.1.5	Indoor Temperature and Humidity Requirements
Design temperatures shall conform to ASHRAE Standard 55. Temperatures shall be maintained throughout
occupied spaces, regardless of outside temperatures, during the hours of normal operation of the facility.
Seasonal design relative humidity values shall be as follows, unless otherwise designated by the project
requirements:
•	Conformance With ASHRAE: Except where indicated differently, relative humidity levels for each season
shall be maintained in accordance with the ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals.
•	Cooling Season: The design relative humidity shall be 50 percent. Summer humidification shall not be
provided for personnel comfort. Cooling systems shall be designed to maintain the relative humidity
conditions of the space through the normal cooling process.
•	Heating Season: Except where it can be substantiated from records or engineering computations that the
indoor relative humidity will be less than 30 percent, winter humidification for personnel comfort and
health shall not be provided. Where the probable occurrence of these conditions has been substantiated,
a design relative humidity of 30 percent shall be used in establishing minimum requirements for
humidification equipment.
7.1.6	Balancing Devices
The Project A/E must specify the components necessary to test and balance the HVAC system in accordance with
SMACNA, ASHRAE, AABC and NEBB standards.
7.1.7	Service Access and Clearances
Sufficient horizontal and vertical clearances shall be provided around all HVAC system equipment, as
recommended by the manufacturer and in compliance with local code requirements for routine maintenance and
equipment replacement. Access doors or panels shall be provided for ventilation equipment, ductwork and
plenums to facilitate inspection and cleaning.
Mechanical equipment rooms shall have clear ceiling heights of at least 12 feet. Catwalks with stairways shall be
provided for all equipment that cannot be maintained from floor level. Where maintenance requires the lifting of
heavy parts (100 pounds or more), hoists and hatchways shall be installed.
7-2 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Mechanical rooms shall be configured with clear circulation aisles and adequate access to all equipment in
accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and applicable standards. Mechanical rooms shall have
adequate doorways (or areaways) and staging areas to permit the replacement and removal of equipment without
the need to demolish walls or relocate other equipment. Sufficient space for maintenance and removal of coils,
filters, motors and similar devices shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.
Chillers shall be located to permit pulling of tubes from all units. The clearance shall equal the length of the tubes
plus 2 feet. Air handling units (AHUs) require a minimum clearance of 2.5 feet on all sides, except the sides on
which filters and coils are accessed, where a 2-foot clearance is acceptable.
Access to roof-mounted equipment shall be provided via stairways and per code.
7.1.8	Mechanical Rooms
All mechanical rooms must be mechanically ventilated to maintain room space conditions, as indicated in ASHRAE
Standard 62.1 and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems. Locations and
characteristics of water lines shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70. Mechanical rooms shall have floor
drains in proximity to the equipment they serve, to reduce water streaks or drain lines extending into aisles. (Floor
drains shall discharge to the facility's industrial/process sewer system, and not to any storm drains). Mechanical
rooms shall not be used as return air, outdoor air or mixing plenums.
Rooms that house emergency generators shall meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems, and meet the combustion air requirements of the equipment, OSHA requirements, and
state and local air emissions/air quality regulations. These rooms must be ventilated sufficiently to remove heat
gain from equipment operation and maintain ambient temperature requirements during operations (including
periodic turn-over testing and idling). Supply and exhaust louvers shall be located to prevent short-circuiting of
airflow. Generator exhaust shall be carried up to the roof level in a flue that is constructed and installed in
conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations and local code requirements. Horizontal exhaust through
a building wall must be approved by the EPA Project Manager.
7.1.9	Refrigerants
Use of ozone-depleting substances and high global warming potential hydrofluorocarbons is prohibited. The
Project A/E shall select refrigeration and air conditioning equipment that uses refrigerants identified by the EPA's
Significant New Alternatives Policy (SNAP) program as alternatives to ozone-depleting substances and high global
warming potential hydrofluorocarbons. Refer to the EPA's SNAP program for the list of alternatives, available at
40 CFR 82, Subpart G, as well as http://www.epa.gov/snap.
7.1.10	Insulation
Field-applied insulation shall be provided for HVAC air distribution systems and piping systems that are located
within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings and for plumbing systems. Insulation shall:
•	Be provided and installed in accordance with the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association (MICA)
National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards.
•	Have thermal resistance values that meet or exceed the minimum requirements per the IECC.
•	Be chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)- and hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC)-free.
•	Meet the minimum recycled content levels required by the EPA's Comprehensive Procurement
Guidelines, where applicable.
7.1.11	Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories
Special design criteria are required for BSL laboratories. The Project A/E shall work with EPA SMEs to determine
design requirements.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-3

-------
7.1.12 Records Storage Facilities and Areas
Records storage facilities and areas shall be designed in accordance with 36 CFR 1234.
7.2 Ventilation Systems
Within this section, Sections 7.2.1 through 7.2.8 contain general requirements for ventilation systems at all types
of EPA facilities. Additional, specialized requirements for laboratory ventilation systems are discussed in Sections
7.2.9 and 7.2.10. Non-laboratory spaces shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1.
7.2.1 Duct Design
General Requirements
Ductwork systems shall be designed for efficient distribution of air to and from the conditioned spaces.
As described in Chapter 10, Fire Protection, within these A&E Guidelines, duct smoke detectors shall be installed in
accordance with NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
Ductwork systems shall be designed to meet the leakage rate requirements of the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual.
Ductwork, accessories and support systems shall be designed to comply with the following:
•	ACGIH Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice for Design.
•	ANSI/American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA)/American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) Z9.2,
Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Ventilation Systems.
•	ANSI/AIHA/ASSE Z9.5, American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation.
•	ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
•	ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals.
•	NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
•	NFPA 91, Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists, and Particulate Solids.
•	NFPA 96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
•	SMACNA 1520, Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards.
•	SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
•	SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible.
•	SMACNA HVAC Systems Duct Design.
Insulation
All supply air ductwork shall be insulated with a vapor barrier, unless otherwise dictated by the project criteria.
Supply air ductwork installed below ceilings and in conditioned spaces may not require insulation if the
surrounding air has a sufficiently low dew point such that condensation will not occur (as verified by engineering
calculations). Return and exhaust air ductwork that runs through unconditioned space shall be insulated if
condensation may occur, or if an energy recovery system is in place. In laboratories, insulation shall not be
installed inside ductwork.
Air Distribution
Supply, return and exhaust air ducts shall be designed and constructed to allow no more than 3 percent leakage of
total airflow in systems up to 3 inches of water column (in WC) pressure. In systems that operate between 3 in WC
and 10 in WC, ducts shall be designed and constructed to limit leakage to 0.5 percent of the total airflow. All
7-4 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
ductwork joints and all connections to air handling and air distribution devices shall be sealed with mastic,
including all supply and return ducts, any ceiling plenums used as ducts, and all exhaust ducts. Energy
consumption, security, and sound attenuation shall be major considerations in the routing, sizing, and material
selection for the air distribution ductwork.
Ductwork Pressure and Velocity
Ductwork shall be designed in accordance with the ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals and constructed in
accordance with the ASHRAE Handbook—HVACSystems and Equipment and the SMACNA Design Manuals.
The duct network shall be pressure-tested after installation. The maximum acceptable leakage rate is defined in
the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
7.2.2	Air Handling Units
Access Doors
AHUs are confined spaces per OSHA regulations in 29 CFR 1910.146, Permit-Required Confined Spaces. Special
safety precautions are therefore necessary before personnel attempt to access an AHU for inspection or servicing.
All access doors to AHUs shall be labeled, "Confined Space—Do Not Enter Without Proper Permits and Safety
Procedures." Access doors shall comply with applicable NFPA standards, the IBC or local fire codes if more
stringent.
Condensate
Reuse of condensate from AHUs (and the entire air handling system) shall be considered, particularly in geographic
locations with extended periods of warm, humid climatic conditions. In applications where AHU condensate reuse
is life cycle cost-effective, it shall be implemented. Condensate recovery is discussed in greater detail in Section
7.5.2, Energy and Water Efficiency, within these A&E Guidelines.
Terminal Units
Variable air volume (VAV) terminals shall be certified under the ANSI/Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute (AHRI) Standard 880 Certification Program and shall carry the ANSI/AHRI Seal. If fan-powered, the
terminals shall be designed, built, and tested as a single unit, including the motor and fan assembly, primary air
damper assembly, and any accessories. VAV terminals shall be pressure-independent type units. Air leakage from
the casing of each individual VAV box/terminal shall not exceed 2 percent of its rated capacity. Units shall have
self-contained controls that are compatible with the BAS as described in Chapter 9, Building Automation Systems,
within these A&E Guidelines. Fan-powered terminals shall be equipped with ducted returns, featuring a filter/filter
rack assembly with MERV 10 filters. The return duct shall be covered on all externally exposed sides with a
minimum of 2 inches of insulation. Fan-powered terminals shall have electronically commutated motors for speed
control to allow continuous fan speed adjustment from maximum to minimum, as a means of setting/adjusting the
fan airflow.
The return plenum box for fan-powered terminals shall be a minimum of 24 inches in length and shall be double-
walled (with insulation in between) or contain at least one elbow, where space allows. Fan-powered terminals may
have hot water heating coils used for maintaining temperature conditions in the space under partial load
conditions. However, fan-powered terminals located in proximity to the perimeter zones and on the top floor of
the building shall always contain hot water coils for heating.
7.2.3	Fans
Fans shall be designed and specified to ensure stable, non-pulsing and aerodynamic operation in the design range
of operation, over varying speeds. Fans with motors of 20 horsepower (hp) or less shall be designed with
adjustable motor pulley sheaves to assist in air-balancing the fan. Fans with motors of greater than 20 hp shall use
fixed (non-adjustable) drives that can be adjusted by using fixed motor pulley sheaves of different diameters.
Supply AHUs and return air fans in VAV systems shall control capacity using variable-frequency drives (VFDs). All
fans shall comply with the following:
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-5

-------
•	ANSI/Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 210, Laboratory Method of Testing Fans for
Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
•	ASHRAE Handbook— HVAC Systems and Equipment.
•	ACGIH Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice for Design.
Fans shall be located in accordance with the requirements of AMCA 201. Motors shall be sized according to
properly calculated brake horsepower (bhp) fan requirements (Do not specify "oversized" fans and motors to meet
future capacity needs unless directed to by the project criteria.) Fan construction materials shall be selected based
on corrosion resistance, structural integrity/fatigue resistance over the required performance period and cost.
Spark-resistant materials shall be used where required by NFPA standards. All fans and accessories shall be
designed and specified to meet all requirements of NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials, regarding controlling spread of smoke and flame. Smoke detectors for
automatic control in air distribution systems shall be located in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 90A.
7.2.4	Under-Floor Air Distribution Systems
All under-floor air distribution (UFAD) systems shall be designed in accordance with the ASHRAE UFAD Guide.
Areas to be considered for UFAD systems should be carefully evaluated on a case-by-case basis. UFAD systems
shall not be installed in any laboratory spaces, unless approved by the EPA Project Manager.
7.2.5	Exhaust Air Energy Recovery
The Project A/E shall consider exhaust air heat recovery systems such as:
•	Rotary air wheels/enthalpy wheels (can be considered under certain circumstances, but not in chemistry
laboratory applications; consult the EPA Project Manager).
•	Air-to-air heat exchangers.
•	Heat pipes.
•	Run-around systems (closed loop and open loop).
•	Air-to-water heat pumps.
7.2.6	Fire and Smoke Dampers
Fire and smoke dampers must be installed to meet all code, NFPA, ASHRAE and SMACNA requirements.
7.2.7	Demand-Controlled Ventilation and Carbon Dioxide Monitoring Equipment
Demand-controlled ventilation (DCV) shall be provided in high occupancy zones (e.g., conference rooms, training
rooms) and remote ventilation zones (e.g., storage rooms), and shall be compliant with ASHRAE Standard 62.1. The
DCV system shall be integrated with the BAS and include carbon dioxide (C02) sensors for interior (between 3 feet
and 6 feet above the floor) and exterior measurements. Laboratory facilities shall not be equipped with DCV in any
spaces (including support spaces) without the EPA Project Manager's approval.
DCV systems generally should be sized based on the peak occupancy of the space or zone and allow ventilation
rates to vary, depending on occupancy. This will maximize energy savings while also ensuring that spaces can be
rapidly purged (and required air quality levels restored) upon resumption of occupancy. Ventilation systems that
are downsized based on less than 100 percent diversity may not be capable of purging all required zones quickly
enough, and thus are not recommended in DCV applications. (Note: Systems with airside economizers already
have the capability to rapidly introduce outdoor air into the HVAC system, and thus could potentially be
downsized. Evaluate these systems on a case-by-case basis).
Contaminants shall be controlled at the source in such a manner that the following indicator levels for carbon
monoxide (CO), C02 and formaldehyde (HCHO) are not exceeded:
7-6 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	CO: 2 parts per million (ppm), 8-hour time weighted average (TWA).
•	C02: 1,000 ppm, TWA (maximum); 850 ppm, TWA (recommended).
•	HCHO: 0.05 ppm, TWA.
The DCV system shall regulate outside air ventilation such that, in office facilities, occupied space C02 is
maintained to no more than 650 ppm above outside air conditions. CO and pressure differential monitoring shall
be connected to the BAS for all spaces adjacent to (above, below or to the side of) automobile, truck or other
sources of combustion byproducts idling.
7.2.8	Exhaust and Pressurization for Areas With Battery Storage, Hazardous Gases or Chemicals
Where battery storage, hazardous gases, or chemicals may be present or used (including garages,
housekeeping/laundry areas, and copying/printing rooms), each space shall be sufficiently exhausted to create a
negative pressure with respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are closed. For each of these
spaces, self-closing doors shall be provided, and the space shall have either deck-to-deck partitions or a hard lid
ceiling. The exhaust rate shall be at least 0.5 cubic feet per minute (cfm)/ft2, with no air recirculation.
7.2.9	Laboratory Ventilation Systems
General Requirements
Occupant health and safety shall be the primary and overriding goal of all laboratory ventilation systems.
Therefore, laboratory ventilation systems must function effectively in conjunction with all fume hoods and
associated exhaust systems. (Refer to Section 7.2.10, Laboratory Fume Hoods, of these A&E Guidelines.)
Maintaining comfortable interior temperature and humidity levels—to the extent possible given variation in
occupant preferences—is also a critical goal for ventilation system design.
The HVAC system for the sections of the laboratory building (including corridors) where the laboratory and
laboratory support rooms are located shall be designed with 100 percent dedicated outside air systems (DOASs),
with the exhaust directed through fume hoods (where fume hoods are present) and general exhaust ducts. Under
no circumstances will the air supplied to any laboratory space be re-circulated to any other space.
The Project A/E shall assume that many of the HVAC systems at EPA laboratories must be continuously operational
(i.e., 24 hours a day, seven days a week, summer and winter). However, the Project A/E shall work with EPA SMEs
to determine if 24-hour operation is required or an alternate operational mode will suffice.
Laboratory spaces shall be designed to maintain a pressurization level relative to other common spaces that is
appropriate for the type of work performed in each laboratory and is negative to the laboratory corridor and non-
laboratory spaces. The levels of pressurization shall be project-specific and shall be determined in accordance with
ANSI/AIHAZ9.5.
Certain areas (e.g., at or in proximity to fume hoods) may require emergency manual override controls, which
increase fresh supply airflow and simultaneously increase negative pressurization. The HVAC system that serves
those laboratory area(s) shall be capable of managing the increased airflow during emergency override conditions.
If the exhaust airflow will exceed the ventilation rate when the emergency override mode is in effect, a delay
period of 30 to 60 seconds (or other suitable period) after triggering the evacuation alarm shall be programmed
into the system. This will aid occupants in evacuating the space before the doors become too difficult to open.
Design Guidelines
It is preferable to optimize the laboratory ventilation rates based on room geometry, research activities, occupancy
schedules and other parameters (as opposed to using a fixed number of air changes per hour [ACH] or fixed
volume flow [i.e., cfm/ft2]). This position has been endorsed by numerous governmental and technical advisory
bodies, including ANSI, AIHA and ACGIH. Key considerations for the design of laboratory ventilation systems
include:
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-7

-------
•	Air change rates in the laboratory modules shall be determined on a project-specific basis. The Project A/E
shall work with EPA SMEs to determine the correct classification of the laboratory module space and the
corresponding requirement for air change rates.
•	A risk hazard assessment of the laboratory areas being affected by construction or renovation shall be
considered before or during design to determine the ability to reduce energy consumption; airflow
reductions and operational setting changes (e.g., occupied/unoccupied modes, fume hood retrofits, ACH
change) must be approved by the EPA.
•	All relevant provisions of the IBC, as well as federal, state, or local regulations and codes, that are more
stringent than the guidelines and requirements referenced herein must be followed. Where such codes
are judged outdated or unduly restrictive, a variance should be sought from the applicable agency.
•	Excessive ventilation rates must be avoided, because they can result in increased concentrations of
airborne contaminants by increasing the quantities partitioned into the air and subsequent dispersion
within the room.
•	The mixing properties of any contaminants of concern that might be inadvertently spilled or released
within the laboratory space shall be evaluated. CFD modeling may be required to assess the time-
dependent dispersal of contaminants. Instantaneous concentrations generated by the model shall be
compared with applicable OSHA or ACGIH health-based standards (e.g., permissible exposure limits,
threshold limit values) and action levels (e.g., immediately dangerous to life or health [IDLH]
concentrations).
•	Hazardous chemical "control banding" may be used to ensure that operations are segregated or grouped
to use the minimum safe ventilation rates for each band. Control bands are determined by a chemical's
(1) relative toxicity, (2) quantities used/"scale" of the process, and (3) tendency to become airborne under
conditions likely to occur routinely at the laboratory. Control banding also can be used for selection of
fume hoods (refer to Section 7.2.10, Laboratory Fume Hoods, of these A&E Guidelines) and to determine
which processes require even greater isolation (e.g., glove boxes).
•	Rather than over-sizing the primary ventilation and exhaust systems, the Project A/E shall include
appropriate emergency override ventilation systems, as previously described.
•	Identify all temperature control zones within each laboratory module (or laboratory wing) and provide
sensors to control each zone.
•	Rebalance the HVAC system and reset controls during commissioning to maintain proper airflows and
temperatures.
•	Be prepared and configured to handle ultra-dilute reference samples of chemical agents for the U.S.
Department of Homeland Security.
Setback Mechanism
A setback mechanism shall be included (e.g., sash switch or equal), which provides a low-speed operations setting
for fume hood exhaust and supply airflow control valves. The setback mechanism shall be designed to provide,
when the sash is fully closed, a minimum of 25 cfm/ft2 of fume hood work surface and 4 ACH. (A lower ACH level
may be approved by the EPA Project Manager.) The exhaust requirements of fume hoods and other exhaust
devices, as well as the temperature and humidity requirements, shall override laboratory minimum ACH. The
decrease in exhaust volumes and ACH must be balanced by an appropriate reduction in supply air/AHU fan speeds,
in order to maintain negative pressure inside the laboratories and laboratory support rooms, with respect to
corridors and other non-laboratory spaces. The HVAC system(s) nighttime setback shall be controlled by the BAS.
7-8 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Chilled Beams and Other Sensible Cooling Equipment
Chilled beams and other sensible cooling equipment shall be considered for laboratory modules with extreme
internal heat loads.
7.2.10 Laboratory Fume Hoods
Laboratory fume hoods (hereafter "fume hoods"), as constructed, manufactured, installed and used, shall conform
to current EPA design, testing, safety, health and environmental requirements in the EPA Performance
Requirements for Laboratory Fume Hoods. The Project A/E and EPA Project Manager (and appropriate EPA SMEs)
shall coordinate and be responsible for selecting fume hood types and sizes that are appropriate to the intended
uses. A current list of fume hood models that meet the EPA Performance Requirements for Laboratory Fume Hoods
"as manufactured" tests can be obtained from the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division. Specialty fume hoods
presenting extreme hazards (e.g., perchloric acid fume hoods) must follow federal, state, and local regulations and
codes. Fume hoods shall be considered an integral part of the overall building HVAC system and shall be included
in TAB activities prior to building acceptance.
At a minimum, the following considerations shall be implemented during any design process that involves fume
hood selection and installation:
•	Identify any user-specific needs for fume hood environmental monitoring.
•	Identify any specific containment requirements.
•	Prior to fume hood selection, conduct LCCAs and a retrofit evaluation to determine if new fume hoods or
fume hood retrofits are needed. Retrofits include, but are not limited to, airfoil retrofit packages and
bypass perforated grills, which increase performance in older fume hoods and reduce energy
consumption.
•	Determine the type and size of fume hood needed to perform laboratory operations.
•	Identify if constant (full bypass) or VAV (partial bypass) fume hood controls are to be used.
•	Confirm satisfactory performance testing of potential fume hood and control system configurations in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 110 and the EPA Performance Requirements for Laboratory Fume
Hoods.
•	Analyze expected laboratory space airflow dynamics to evaluate whether airflow tracking, active
pressurization control or a combination of both is required.
•	Properly select the location and type of room supply air diffusers.
•	Determine the failure mode of all terminal boxes to ensure that the laboratory pressurization criteria are
met under all anticipated operating conditions.
•	Confirm that laboratory temperature control does not override the minimum fume hood ventilation
requirements.
•	Analyze the effects of cross-draft velocities, room diffuser type(s) and diffuser location(s) when evaluating
whether a fume hood(s) design configuration and operating parameters will ensure effective contaminant
containment.3
In accordance with ANSI/AIHA/ASSE Z9.5, American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation, the flow rate of
constant volume fume hoods and the minimum flow rate of VAV fume hoods shall be sufficient to prevent
hazardous concentrations of contaminants within the fume hood. In addition to maintaining proper hood face
velocity, fume hoods shall maintain a minimum exhaust volume to ensure that contaminants are properly diluted
3
Smith, T.C. and N. Paschke, Investigating Fume Hood Performance as a Function of Laboratory Air Supply, Labs21 2007 Annual Conference,
www.is2l.org/elibrary/smith2007.html.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-9

-------
and exhausted from the fume hood. The Project A/E may increase the minimum fume hood flow rate if the
ventilation equipment and the airflow control system cannot regulate room air rates at the values required to
effectively pressurize the room.
Basic Fume Hood Requirements
Generally, it is the EPA's preference to specify high performance fume hoods (e.g., those designed to operate in
the range of 60 feet per minute [fpm], compared with conventional fume hoods, which operate at 80 to 100 fpm),
where practicable. EPA fume hoods shall have an ASHRAE performance rating, as manufactured, of 4.0 AM 0.05
(i.e., leakage rate < 0.05 ppm at 4.0 liters per minute at the design sash opening).
Materials used in the construction of fume hoods and of associated fans shall meet corrosion resistance standards
for the chemicals used and generated in the hood. Fans shall be rated or otherwise approved for use by a
recognized certifying body. Plumbing fixtures and electrical outlets must meet existing codes. In addition, the fume
hood system design and installation shall meet the following requirements:
•	Ceiling and wall diffusers for the distribution of supply air in the laboratory shall be selected and located
in a manner such that the air velocity at the face of the fume hood does not exceed 30 fpm. Diffusers shall
(1) be located at least 5 feet from the face of any fume hood; (2) be located to the side of the hood rather
than in front of the hood; (3) shall not "short circuit" the airflow to a fume hood; and (4) shall not blow
directly on fire, vapor or radioactivity detectors.
•	All fume hoods must be capable of passing the criteria established in the EPA Performance Requirements
for Laboratory Fume Hoods, under "as manufactured" and "as installed" test conditions.
•	The sash shall be equipped with a control device to maintain it at the operating height (e.g., releasable
sash stops). Automatic sash closers shall be considered.
•	All fume hoods shall be equipped with a low-exhaust flow alarm system designed to signal unsafe
operating conditions whenever the average face velocity decreases. The hood shall have a digital display
monitor with a low-flow audible and visible alarm calibrated to alarm at 90 percent of the specified low-
end passing range value in fpm (i.e., 54 fpm for a low-flow fume hood with passing range of 60 to 70 fpm,
and 81 fpm for a standard fume hood with a passing range of 90 to 110 fpm). The monitor shall indicate
face velocity quantitatively with a minimum accuracy of ฑ5 percent of the specified value in fpm. The
monitor's digital display and alarm conditions shall be clearly visible in the installed location. (Note: Per
OSHA regulations in 29 CFR 1910.1450, Occupational Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories,
fume hoods and other protective equipment are required to function properly, and specific measures
shall be taken to ensure proper and adequate performance of such equipment.) The alarm system shall
consist of an audible and visual alarm to indicate malfunction or unsafe operating conditions. Additional
utility and service requirements shall be indicated for each specific laboratory facility project.
•	The noise exposure at the working position in front of the fume hood shall not exceed 70 A-weighted
decibels (dBa) with the system operating and the sash open, nor shall it exceed 55 dBa at bench-top level
elsewhere in the laboratory room. Each new fume hood installation shall be certified as meeting this
requirement before initial use and shall be recertified annually thereafter. Fans used in the exhaust
systems servicing fume hoods shall be low-noise generating and corrosion-resistant to the fumes
generated inside the fume hood. Total room performance with respect to noise levels must not exceed
the permissible exposure limits specified in 29 CFR 1910.95.
Fume Hood Exhaust Systems
Fume hood exhaust systems shall be designed in accordance with the ACGIH Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of
Recommended Practice for Design; ANSI/AIHA/ASSE Z9.5; and NFPA 45, Standard on Fire Protection for
Laboratories Using Chemicals. Individual exhaust systems shall be provided for fume hoods when:
•	The mixing of emissions from the individual hoods is inadvisable; or
7-10 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	The emissions must be filtered, scrubbed or otherwise treated before discharge.
Perchloric acid fume hoods shall have independent exhaust systems that comply with ANSI/AIHA/ASSE Z9.5.
Pressure in laboratories shall be maintained as negative with respect to adjacent areas, unless positive pressure is
required for the research conducted in the laboratory module.
Fume hood and equipment exhaust manifolds shall be constructed from PVC-coated galvanized sheet metal or
Type 316 welded stainless steel, depending on the physical and chemical characteristics of the exhaust. Specialty
duct materials shall be considered for highly corrosive exhaust applications. Exhaust ductwork from fume hoods
shall not be of spiral construction and shall be sloped toward the hood for drainage of condensate. Fume hood
exhaust ducts shall also be constructed with welded longitudinal seams and welded transverse joints, or equivalent
construction, in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AIHA/ASSE Z9.2. Fume hood ductwork also shall be
installed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 45, specifically:
•	Both new and remodeled fume hoods shall be equipped with flow-measuring devices.
•	Air exhausted from fume hoods shall not be re-circulated into the workspace.
•	Air from laboratory units and laboratory work areas in which chemicals are present shall be continuously
discharged, and the exhaust systems shall be maintained at a negative pressure (i.e., lower pressure than
the pressure in normally occupied areas of the building).
Wherever feasible and cost-effective, exhaust fans associated with fume hoods shall be equipped with variable-
speed drives (VSD). Exhaust fans shall also be equipped with static pressure reset controls for off-hours operation.
Consistent with ANSI/AIHA/ASSE Z9.5, exhaust from laboratory ductwork systems must be discharged in a
location(s) and manner to avoid re-entry into the laboratory building (or entry into adjacent buildings) at
concentrations above 20 percent of the allowable concentrations inside the laboratory (or adjacent buildings).
These requirements must be achieved under any wind or atmospheric conditions. Fume hood exhaust stacks shall
be constructed without caps, rain hats or other covering, as these can reduce exhaust plume buoyancy.
To optimize the effective stack height and exit gas velocity at the required exhaust flow rate(s), the EPA Project
Manager may require that a dispersion analysis be performed using an acceptable computer model(s). Exhaust
stack heights and velocities shall meet ASHRAE requirements.
Also note that, while commonly-used EPA screening models (e.g., SCREEN3, ISC) are relatively simple to apply and
produce results rapidly, there are documented limitations to their ability to simulate downwash and wake effects
due to structures within close proximity to the exhaust stack(s). For this reason, the application of CFD models (and
in certain complex cases, scale-model wind turbine simulations) may be required to ensure that downstream
contaminant concentration limits established by ANSI/AIHA/ASSE Z9.5 will be achieved.4 (CFD modeling
requirements are covered in Section 7.1.2, Computational Fluid Dynamics Modeling, within these A&E Guidelines.)
If a dispersion analysis is not required, the exhaust stack shall extend a minimum of 10 feet above the adjacent
roof level and operate at an exhaust discharge velocity as necessary to meet ASHRAE requirements.
For fume hoods in areas designated as Group H-5 in accordance with the IBC, emergency power systems must be
installed. In addition, the exhaust ventilation system shall be designed to operate at a minimum of 50 percent of
the normal fan speed while on emergency power, or at a higher rate if necessary to comply with safety, health and
environmental requirements.
^ Petersen, R.L., B.C. Cochran, and J.W. LeCompte, Specifying Exhaust Systems that Avoid Fume Reentry and Adverse Health Effects, ASHRAE
Transactions, Vol. 108, Pt. 2, 2002.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-11

-------
Manifolding of Fume Hood Exhausts
Fume hood exhausts shall be manifolded per NFPA 45. Manifolded exhaust systems (where used) shall incorporate
staged, multiple fans with VSDs and control dampers to maintain a constant static pressure in the manifold. This
type of configuration ensures a quick response to changing conditions within the fume hoods.
Fume Hood Emissions Controls
In most situations, the exhaust from chemicals will be diluted enough and/or will be in quantities small enough to
be exempt from Clean Air Act (CAA) regulations. However, local, state and EPA requirements shall always be
reviewed for any construction project that will add fume hoods. The aggregate amount of emissions from the
facility and/or the quantities and rates of emission from fume hoods in certain cases may trigger (or contribute to
existing) permitting requirements under Title V of the CAA or rules governing minor (non-Title V) sources.
Additional information regarding potential CAA requirements for fume hoods and associated exhaust systems is
provided in the EPA Environmental Management Manual.
If emissions controls are required, appropriate control devices (e.g., particulate filters, HEPA filters, scrubbers,
activated carbon canisters) shall be installed. Equipment that condenses, traps, neutralizes or polymerizes5 the
hazardous substance(s) before it exits the fume hood shall be considered where feasible, because the quantity of
waste requiring disposal will typically be 100 to 1,000 times less than that associated with capturing the
contaminant from the airborne exhaust with a scrubber or activated carbon bed.6
Where utilized, scrubbers shall be configured with countercurrent flow between the airstream and the reagent to
maximize removal efficiency. Scrubbing liquid shall be captured in a sump below the scrubber, and a recirculation
system (pump and piping) shall be provided to aid in conserving the reagent chemical. The following sensors and
controls shall be provided:
•	A liquid level sensor and controls on the sump to initiate make-up water flow at low level and shut down
airflow at high level.
•	A pH probe and controller to trigger additional reagent chemical flow when required.
•	A conductivity meter and controls that measures total dissolved solids and activates a blowdown valve to
drain excess salts.
An in-line filter also shall be provided in the recirculation loop to remove particulates that are likely to be captured
by any scrubber (in addition to the targeted chemical[s] of concern).
Scrubbers for control of corrosive fumes shall be located as close as possible to the fume hood(s) or be constructed
of a suitable corrosion-resistant material.
Activated carbon beds shall be equipped with sampling ports to aid in assessing when contaminant breakthrough
has occurred (or better breakthroughs are about to occur). The O&M manual for the carbon beds shall also specify
the expected life to break-through at various concentrations and exhaust airflow rates for the contaminants of
concern. Used carbon shall be disposed, where necessary as hazardous waste, in accordance with the EPA
Environmental Management Manual.
Unless otherwise directed by the EPA Project Manager, HEPA filters will be required to manage exhaust from fume
hoods in which radiological, bio-hazardous or chemical agents are handled. HEPA filter housings shall be designed
to minimize any possible contact or exposure to the contaminants of concern during filter change-outs. Guidance
on the selection and design of radioactive air-cleaning devices can be found in the DOE Nuclear Air Cleaning
Handbook and in ANSI/ASME N509, Nuclear Power Plant Air-Cleaning Units and Components. Additional
requirements for HEPA filters are contained in Section 7.3.2, Air Filtration Systems, within these A&E Guidelines.
Using an initiator compound to convert a substance to a solid or gel with low vapor pressure (e.g., acrylonitrile).
ฎ Hitchings, D.T., Fume Hood Scrubbers, SAFELAB Corporation, September/October 1993.
7-12 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Other Ventilated Enclosures
Ventilated enclosures are often required by a laboratory to help dissipate heat and ensure containment of
chemical or biological airborne contaminants produced during certain work activities. These types of enclosures
have special design requirements for their intended uses. Ventilated devices (other than fume hoods) used to
control hazardous materials must be approved on a case-by-case basis by the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division
and the EPA Real Property Services Staff. Ventilated devices used for removal of heat or nuisance odors must
comply with the parameters set forth in the ACGIH Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice for
Design. Additionally, other types of ventilated enclosures, such as glove boxes, biological safety cabinets and
flammable liquid storage cabinets, shall meet NFPA and other code requirements.
7.3 Indoor Air Quality Requirements
7.3.1	Ventilation Rates
The outdoor air ventilation rates specified in ASHRAE Standard 62.1 are the minimum acceptable ventilation rates
for EPA buildings. Instrumentation and controls shall be provided to assure outdoor air intake rates are maintained
during occupied hours. Where occupancy requirements are likely to generate high levels of airborne particles,
special air filtration shall be provided on the return air system, or dedicated and localized exhaust systems shall be
utilized to contain airborne particulates.
7.3.2	Air Filtration Systems
Air filtration shall be provided in every air handling system. Each AHU shall have a disposable pre-filter and a final
filter. The filter media shall be rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2, Method of Testing General
Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. The pre-filters shall be MERV 8, and the
final filters shall be MERV 13. Filter racks shall be designed to minimize the bypass of air around the filter media;
the maximum allowable bypass leakage shall be 0.5 percent. All filtration system designs must be approved by the
EPA Real Property Services Staff and the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division prior to construction.
HEPA Filtration
HEPA filters shall be used where required for specific laboratory functions. HEPA filters shall have an efficiency of
99.97 percent for particulates of 0.3 microns or greater, as determined by the dioctyl phthalate aerosol test; meet
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 586, Standard for High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter Units; and satisfy ASHRAE
Standard 52.2. It is recommended that a compensating damper be installed with a HEPA filter so that the airflow
will remain constant over the life of the filter. It is good practice to install a pre-filter ahead of a HEPA filter to
prolong the life of the HEPA filter. In general, bag-in/bag-out filter housings shall be used to minimize the spread of
contaminants when the HEPA or pre-filter is changed. The resistance of HEPA filters to airflow, especially when
airflow is loaded with contaminants, must be considered when designing the system. The pressure drop across
HEPA and pre-filters shall be monitored and linked to an alarm indicating the need for filter change-out. HEPA
filters may need fire protection; check with the EPA Project Manager for requirements.
7.3.3	Location of Air Intake(s)
The outside air intake(s) shall be located to provide the cleanest possible source of fresh air for the building and
shall be located outside the probable discharge areas for plumes of contaminated air from exhausts and vent
stacks. Exhausts and vent stacks include, but are not limited to, fume hood exhausts; vehicle exhausts; exhausts
from adjacent structures; and sources of potential microbial contamination, such as vegetation, organic matter,
and bird and animal droppings. For buildings of more than four stories, fresh air intakes shall be located on the
fourth floor or higher. For buildings of three stories or less, intakes shall be located high on the building walls
(preferred) or on the roof, if wall-mounting is impracticable.
Special care shall be exercised not to locate mechanical air intakes within or near the loading dock area. Air intakes
also shall comply with GSA PBS-P100 and be located in accordance with the Department of Health and Human
Services/CDC/National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Publication 2002-139, Guidance for Protecting
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-13

-------
Building Environments from Airborne Chemical, Biological, or Radiological Attacks. However, protection from such
attacks shall not be provided at the expense of introducing other potential contaminants (e.g., building exhausts)
into the ventilation system.
7.4 Heating Systems
7.4.1	Energy Efficiency
In addition to meeting the energy efficiency requirements discussed in Section 7.1.1 within these A&E Guidelines,
the Project A/E shall consider the following energy efficiency measures during design of the heating system, where
technically feasible and life cycle cost-effective:
•	Cogeneration: Consider the use of a cogeneration plant as a possible alternative in the planning of any
large steam generation facility.
•	Heat Recovery From Condensate: Consider heat recovery from boiler condensate during boiler system
design. Heat exchanger(s) may be utilized to remove heat from condensate not returned to the boiler.
This recovered heat can be used to pre-heat domestic hot water, boiler make-up water, or low-
temperature water returned to a boiler or heat exchanger.
•	Flue Gas Heat Exchangers: Consider use of flue gas heat exchangers in condensing or non-condensing
boilers. Under all anticipated operating conditions, the stack temperature shall remain above the carbonic
acid dew point to prevent flue damage.
•	Ground Source Heat Pump: See Section 7.4.4 within these A&E Guidelines.
7.4.2	Hot Water Distribution
Hot Water Piping
Pipes shall be marked in accordance with ANSI/ASME A13.1.
Pumps
Pumps shall be selected to ensure optimal operation at both part-load and full-load conditions. The number of
primary hot water pumps shall correspond to the number of boilers, and a standby pump shall be provided for
redundancy. Variable volume pumping systems shall be considered for all piping systems with pump horsepower
greater than 11.2 kilowatts (kW) or 15 hp.
7.4.3	Boilers
Standards
Heating equipment shall comply with the following standards, except where noted otherwise:
•	Oil-Fired Heaters: NFPA 31, Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment.
•	Gas-Fired Heaters: NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.
•	Liquefied Petroleum Gas-Fired Heaters: NFPA 58, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code.
•	Liquefied Natural Gas-Fired Heaters: NFPA 59A, Standard for the Production, Storage, and Handling of
Liquefied Natural Gas.
•	All Boilers: NFPA 85, Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazards Code.
Boilers shall be sized per ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
Fuel Storage
Where liquid fuel is used, provide a UL-listed, double-wall containment type storage tank. For facilities that are
required to develop an SPCC plan, the requirements of that plan will govern.
7-14 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
For specific requirements regarding fuel storage, refer to:
•	NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
•	EPA Environmental Management Manual.
Gas Trains
Boiler gas trains shall be installed in accordance with ASME CSD-1, Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically
Fired Boilers.
Automatic Valve Actuators
Gas valve actuators shall not contain sodium/potassium elements, since these may pose a danger to maintenance
personnel.
Venting
Products of combustion from fuel-fired appliances and equipment shall be vented outdoors from the building
through breaching, vent, stack and/or chimney systems. Breaching connections from fuel-fired equipment to
vents, stacks or chimneys shall be horizontal wherever possible and shall comply with NFPA 54. Vents, stacks and
chimneys shall be vertical and shall comply with NFPA 54 and NFPA 211, Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents,
and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances. Breaching, vent, stack, and chimney systems may operate under negative,
neutral, or positive pressure (depending on the application) and shall be designed based on (1) flue gas
temperature and dew point; (2) length and configuration of the system; and (3) vent pipe insulation
characteristics.
Venting materials shall be factory-fabricated and assembled in the field. The vents may either be double-wall or
single-wall construction, depending on the distance from adjacent combustible or non-combustible materials.
Material types, ratings and distances to adjacent building materials shall comply with NFPA 54 and NFPA 211.
Boiler Water Treatment
Boiler water treatment shall be provided to prevent deposits onto, or corrosion of, internal boiler surfaces, and to
prevent the carryover of boiler water solids into the steam or hot water supply. Water quality measures for the
heating plant and for other site process water users should be coordinated, and water conservation measures shall
be implemented wherever feasible and life cycle cost-effective. These measures may include use of reclaimed
water (e.g., collected rainwater) as feed water, recovery and use of condensate and blowdown water, or other
measures.
The design of the boiler water treatment plant shall provide an automated chemical feed system and allow for
daily sampling to determine internal water conditions. The plant shall contain adequate space and equipment for
storing, handling and mixing treatment chemicals. Continuous versus intermittent blowdown operations shall be
considered to determine which system will keep the concentration of total solids within acceptable limits. For
continuous blowdown operations, the economics of installing a heat recovery system shall be considered.
Blowdown rates and boiler water chemistry control shall be established in accordance with ASME Consensus
Operating Practices for Control of Feed Water/Boiler Water Chemistry in Modern Industrial Boilers.
In accordance with OSHA regulations in 29 CFR 1910.151, Medical Services and First Aid, an emergency eyewash
(shower type) must be provided in any work area(s) where treatment chemicals are being handled.
Boiler Plant Insulation
All hot surfaces within 7 feet of the plant floor (or on any catwalk) shall be insulated to prevent surface
temperatures above:
•	140 ฐF, in areas where contact would be unintentional and unlikely.
•	120 ฐF, in areas where contact is likely or necessary for equipment operation.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-15

-------
Insulation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and the ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals.
7.4.4 Ground Source (Geo-Exchange) Heat Pumps
If a ground source heat pump (GSHP) is included in the project design, the Project A/E must provide the following
data for equipment associated with the GSHP system: design rated capacity, mechanical efficiency, noise ratings,
motor speeds (including VFDs where installed) and electrical characteristics.
Designer Qualifications
The GSHP designer shall have received and maintained an active credential through the Association of Energy
Engineers' Certified GeoExchange Designer program. The designer shall provide three previous project references,
documenting his or her systems have functioned in the intended manner for 12 months without significant repairs
or failures.
7.5 Cooling Systems
7.5.1	Life Cycle Cost Analysis
The LCCA model utilized to evaluate the cooling system must allow for sensitivity evaluations on design parameters
(e.g., pipe size, chiller capacity, condenser water leaving temperature, cooling tower size) in order to identify the
most cost-effective and feasible alternative.
7.5.2	Energy and Water Efficiency
In addition to meeting the energy efficiency requirements discussed in Section 7.1.1 within these A&E Guidelines,
the Project A/E shall consider the following energy and water efficiency measures during design of the cooling
system where technically feasible and life cycle cost-effective:
•	Energy Recovery: Consider energy recovery opportunities from chiller and refrigeration equipment.
•	Condensate Recovery: Consider condensate recovery during AHU, chiller and cooling tower design.
Condensate recovery circuits shall be plumbed and piped separately from any gray water, black water,
recovered rainwater, and potable water systems and labeled accordingly. Recovered condensate shall be
conveyed via gravity flow where possible. Additional flow capacity shall be provided for sprayed-coil
systems. All drain pans and piping shall be insulated to eliminate or minimize sweating. If an outfall or
connection to the sanitary sewer is provided, a deep-seal "U" trap must be installed to forestall any entry
of sewer gas into the condensate collection system. A separate tank or process shall be inserted upstream
from any storage/holding tank(s) to accommodate any necessary pre-treatment for bacterial
contamination (e.g., chlorination, ozonation, other sterilization techniques). Depending on system
operations, removal of oil and grease from bearings and/or wash-down chemicals from foaming sprays
may also be required. This is typically accomplished using skimmers or coalescing separators.
7.5.3	Chilled Water Distribution Piping
Chilled water pipe shall be black carbon steel pipe or hard copper tubing. Standard wall steel pipe or Type L hard
copper pipe will be satisfactory for most applications; however, the piping material selected shall be checked for
design temperature and pressure ratings and shall meet Unified Facilities Guide Specifications 23 05 15, Common
Piping for HVAC.
Pipes shall be marked in accordance with ANSI/ASME A13.1.
7.5.4	Chillers
The selection of centrifugal, reciprocating, helical, rotary-screw, absorption or steam-powered chillers shall be
based on the coefficient of performance under full-load and part-load conditions.
7-16 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Chiller Plant Sizing
Chiller plants shall be sized depending on the specific needs of the project. Where feasible, the EPA's preference is
for multiple, modular units that provide maximum part-load efficiency/turn-down capacity in a life cycle cost-
effective manner. Chiller plants shall also be designed to accommodate potential expansion of the facility's total
load (i.e., by adding new, modular chillers).
During the design process, consideration shall be directed toward installation of modular chiller plants. For
example, the modular approach can help designers match loads effectively using a rotary-screw compressor and a
centrifugal compressor, instead of two centrifugal compressors. A reciprocating chiller could also be part of the
energy-efficient module, combined with a screw compressor or a centrifugal compressor. In general, reciprocating
chillers can serve the smallest loads efficiently, while rotary-screw chillers are the most flexible, and centrifugal
chillers are most efficient when fully loaded. Typical kW/ton profiles must be identified for the loads identified and
temperatures required.
Consideration shall be given to using two chillers of unequal size, instead of two chillers of equal size, which allows
more flexibility in matching loads. In this configuration, the smallest chiller can efficiently meet light loads (e.g., to
keep process cooling equipment operating during the heating or temperate seasons). The additional chillers are
staged to meet higher loads after the lead chiller—which may vary depending on the season—is operating close to
full capacity. If an existing chiller operates frequently at part-load conditions, it may be cost-effective to replace it
with multiple chillers staged to optimally match the demand profile of the facility.
Modular, packaged chillers can be especially useful in laboratory settings. A common problem in laboratory
designs is the need to condition large volumes of incoming air to meet air change and exhaust requirements.
Packaged chillers can assist in "balancing" the cooling load. Laboratory processes can be consolidated such that
high cooling-load operations are concentrated in one area. Dedicated chiller(s) can then be installed to service this
area, allowing the central heating plant chiller to be appropriately sized and precluding costly cooling energy from
being "wasted" (as it would be if the central chiller[s] were over-sized).
7.5.5 Vapor Compression Chillers
Compression refrigeration machines shall be designed with safety controls, relief valves, and rupture disks, and in
compliance with the procedures prescribed by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15.
Capacity Modulation
Centrifugal compressors shall be designed to operate with inlet control or variable-speed control for capacity
modulation. Units shall be capable of modulating to 10 percent of design capacity without surge. Reciprocating
compressors shall be designed for capacity control by cylinder unloading. Designs using hot-gas bypass control of
compressors for capacity modulation shall not be used, except when capacity modulation is required at conditions
below 10 percent of the rated load.
Motors
Compressor motors for refrigeration equipment shall be selected in compliance with all requirements of NFPA 70.
Refrigerants
Chiller design must comply with the CAA Amendments of 1990, Title VI: Stratospheric Ozone Protection, and 40
CFR 82, Protection of Stratospheric Ozone. New chillers shall use refrigerants identified by the EPA's SNAP program
as alternatives to ozone-depleting substances and high global warming potential hydrofluorocarbons. Refer to
EPA's SNAP program for the list of alternatives, available at 40 CFR 82, Subpart G, as well as
http://www.epa.gov/snap. Chillers must be equipped with isolation valves, fittings and service apertures as
appropriate for refrigerant recovery during servicing and repair, as required by Section 608 of the CAA
Amendments.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-17

-------
7.5.6	Absorption Chillers
Minimum full- and part-load ratings for absorption chillers shall meet ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
7.5.7	Condensers
Water-cooled condensers shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 and the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII. Water-cooled condenser shells and tubes shall have removable heads to facilitate tube cleaning.
The use of marine water boxes on the condenser shall be considered for ease of tube cleaning.
All water-cooled condensers must be connected to a re-circulating heat rejecting loop. The heat rejection loop
system shall be designed for a minimum 10 ฐF temperature differential and a minimum of 7 ฐF wet bulb approach
between the outdoor air temperature and the temperature of the water leaving the heat rejection equipment.
Heat tracing shall be provided for piping exposed to weather and for piping installed within 3 feet of the ground
surface.
Air-cooled condensers shall meet the standard rating and testing requirements of ANSI/AHRI Standard 460,
Performance Rating of Remote Mechanical-Draft Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers, and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
20, Methods of Testing for Rating Remote Mechanical-Draft Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers. Air-cooled
condenser intakes shall be located sufficiently distant from any obstructions that would restrict airflow. Air-cooled
equipment shall be located away from noise-sensitive areas, and air-cooled condensers shall have refrigerant low-
head pressure controls to maintain satisfactory operation during light loading.
7.5.8	Cooling Towers
Induced draft cooling towers with multiple-speed or variable-speed condenser fan controls shall be provided.
Cooling tower acceptance and factory rating tests shall be conducted in accordance with Cooling Technology
Institute ATC-105. The cooling towers shall have a clear distance equal to the height of the tower on the air intake
side(s) to keep the air velocity low. Consideration shall be given to piping arrangement and strainer or filter
placement such that accumulated solids are easily removed from the system. Clean-outs for sediment removal and
flushing from basin and piping shall be provided.
Cooling towers shall be located to avoid problems with water drift (i.e., water vapor loss to the ambient air) and
deposition of water treatment chemicals. Ensure cooling towers are equipped with drift eliminators to reduce any
potential loss. Cooling towers shall have ample clearance from any obstructions that would restrict airflow, cause
recirculation of discharge air or inhibit maintenance. The cooling tower's foundation, structural elements and
connections shall be designed to meet local code/wind conditions, but with a minimum 100-miles-per-hour wind
design load. Cooling tower basins and housing shall be constructed of stainless steel. If the cooling tower is located
on the building structure, vibration and sound isolation must be provided wherever required. Noise greater than
80 dBa and/or transmission of resonant frequencies is prohibited. Cooling towers should also not be located in
proximity to deciduous trees, wherever practicable.
Combustible casings are acceptable in cooling towers, provided that the fill and drift eliminators are non-
combustible. (PVC and fire retardant-treated, fiberglass-reinforced plastic are classified as combustible.) In
determining cooling tower requirements, the definitions of combustible and noncombustible in NFPA 214,
Standard on Water-Cooling Towers, shall be used. Cooling towers with more than 2,000 ft3 of combustible fill shall
be provided with an automatic sprinkler system, designed in accordance with NFPA 13, Standard for the
Installation of Sprinkler Systems, and NFPA 214, when any of the following conditions exist:
•	The continued operation of the cooling tower is essential to the operations in the area it services.
•	The building is totally sprinkler-protected.
•	A fire in the cooling tower could cause structural damage or other severe fire exposure to the building.
•	The value of the cooling tower is five or more times the cost of installing the sprinkler protection. The cost
of the sprinkler protection shall include all factors involved, such as the sprinkler piping distribution
7-18 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
system, the heat-sensing system, the control valve, and any special water supplies or extension of water
supplies required.
Cooling towers with airstreams that pass through water shall have the water treated with an EPA-approved biocide
to control etiological organisms, where necessary due to local conditions. In addition, processes to remove
chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, herbicides, or other chemicals using fine filtration, activated carbon, or UV-
catalyzed ozonation may be required depending on incoming concentrations. A maintenance program must be
established to ensure continued, effective operation of these treatment systems.
Multiple cell towers and isolated basins are required to facilitate O&M and ensure redundancy. The number of
cells shall match the number of chillers. Supply piping shall be connected to a manifold to allow for various
combinations of online equipment. Multiple towers shall have equalization piping between cell basins. The
equalization piping shall include isolation valves and automatic shutoff valves between each cell. Cooling towers
shall have ladders and platforms for ease of inspections and replacement of packing and other components.
To prevent cavitation, variable-speed pumps that serve multiple cooling towers shall not operate below 30 percent
of rated capacity. Cooling towers shall be elevated to maintain required net positive suction head on condenser
water pumps and to provide a 4-foot (1.2-meter) minimum clear space beneath the bottom of the lowest
structural member, piping or sump, to allow re-roofing beneath the tower.
Sub-Metering for Measurement and Verification
Cooling towers shall have flow meters that measure water input (cooling tower make-up water) and output water
(blowdown). Cooling water blowdown is water that has traveled through the cooling tower structure and been
cooled by convection and evaporation; it is not identical to boiler blowdown. Cooling towers shall have a
conductivity meter installed to monitor water chemistry and automatically control cooling tower blowdown and
water treatment chemical addition (where applicable). Additional information regarding the EPA's general
metering requirements and requirements for flow metering is provided in Section 7.8, Energy and Water Metering,
within these A&E Guidelines.
Overflow Alarm
The cooling tower basin shall be equipped with an overflow alarm to indicate when water from the cooling tower
basin is overflowing to the sanitary sewer. Overflow drains are included in case the cooling tower make-up line has
a stuck valve, resulting in continuous water flowing to the cooling tower basin. In many cases, this overflow can go
undetected. The overflow alarm shall be connected to the BAS.
Water Efficiency
For conventional applications, cooling towers shall be designed to operate at a concentration ratio of 6 or greater
(where feasible), in order to limit make-up water addition without simultaneously causing excessive scale buildup
on the fill or in ancillary piping. A controller (e.g., solenoid switch) shall be connected to the blowdown control
gate valve and be actuated by variations from the conductivity set point (i.e., an increase or decrease in the total
dissolved solids in the bleed-off line resulting in an out-of-bounds conductivity measurement).
Depending on the application and project requirements, the following design features to enhance water use
efficiency of cooling tower(s) shall also be considered:
•	Use of VFDs on Fan Motors: Cooling towers may be good candidates for VFDs because their motors are
large, their fans often operate for long periods of time, and the applied heat loads can vary both
seasonally and diurnally. High-efficiency motors on fans and efficient transmissions on geared fan drives
shall always be specified.
•	Hybrid Cooling Towers: Consisting of a "dry" or "air only" section above a "wet" or "water" section, this
configuration promotes water efficiency by reducing drift and also aids in limiting visible plumes, which is
useful for sites near residential areas or other areas where visibility is vital (e.g., airports, hospital or
police helipads). The hybrid configuration also offers operational flexibility (e.g., the wet section alone can
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-19

-------
be operated during winter plumes when plume rise is less of a concern). Hybrid cooling towers shall be
selected based on evaluation of both water efficiency and energy efficiency for the application and
operating parameters, because these parameters are sometimes inversely related.
•	Side-Stream Treatment of Bleed-off Water Using Filtration or Lime Softening: Filtration, using sand beds
or paper media (for smaller units), can be beneficial in dusty and dry environments, where removal of
hardness can preclude excessive scale formation; in both cases, the cooling tower will likely be able to
operate at higher concentration ratios.
•	Automated Chemical Feed Systems: Automated chemical feed systems shall be provided, unless
demonstrated to not be life cycle cost-effective. Automated feed systems shall be calibrated to:
-	Increase or decrease the bleed-off volume based on specific conductivity readings (i.e., instantaneous
total dissolved solids in the bleed water fraction).
-	Dose the treatment chemicals based on make-up water flow rates.
These measures will optimize the instantaneous concentration ratio and also reduce labor and analytical
testing costs. Special consideration shall be given to non-chemical water treatment methods, such as
ultrasound, ozonation, electromagnetic pulse-power, filtration, ion exchange or impressed current.
Selection of treatment methods (chemical or non-chemical) shall be dictated by site and project-specific
factors, including wastewater discharge pollutant limits and fees, chemical handling and safety
requirements, electric power availability and cost, available space and size of units or systems, etc.
•	Coupling With Other Onsite Processes: Bleed-off water may be usable for other nonpotable applications,
such as flushing toilets or as fire-fighting reserve water. Conversely, other excess water streams (e.g.,
recovered condensate, reject water from single-pass cooling of refrigeration systems) may be usable as
make-up water for the cooling tower(s).
7.5.9	Data Center Cooling
Airside economizers may aid in reducing cooling load on the central plant system (or packaged, dedicated chillers if
used). Data rooms with high cold-aisle temperatures (e.g., 78 ฐF or above) are more likely to benefit from
operation of an airside economizer. Economizers integrated with the AHU(s) and controlled by the BAS are
generally the preferred option, because they facilitate better control and require less direct oversight by facility
managers. One drawback regarding airside economizers is that they can only be used a few months out of the year
in most U.S. climates.
Many layout and demand-side strategies can be utilized to reduce the overall demand data centers exert on the
facility cooling plant. In particular, "hot aisle-cold aisle" configurations should be employed, to prevent mixing of
exhaust air with fresh (cooler) air supplied by the ventilation system. Aisles must be wide enough for maintenance
access and to conform with local fire/safety codes. Shrouds or ducting is sometimes necessary to create the
desired airflow circulation patterns.
7.5.10	Process Cooling
Laboratories
Laboratories often contain numerous critical processes and equipment that require cooling; examples include:
•	X-ray equipment.
•	Freezers for sample storage.
•	Lasers.
•	Analytical equipment, such as:
-	Gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS).
7-20 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
-	Inductively-coupled plasma/mass spectrometry (ICP/MS).
-	Graphite furnace atomic absorption (GFAA).
-	Electrophoresis.
Laboratories often also require greater stability of temperature and/or pressure in chilled water loops. For
example, maintaining precise temperature set points is critical to operation of sensing lasers in order to ensure
repeatable measurements. In addition, analytical equipment depends on temperature stability as follows:
•	Cooling of argon plasma torches for the ICP/MS and GFAA methods.
•	Cooling of diffusion pumps associated with GC/MS equipment.
Pressure control/stability is essential where chilled water is circulated through glassware, especially where a
positive displacement or turbine chilled water pump is used instead of a centrifugal pump.
Single-pass cooling is not permitted at EPA facilities. Application of small to moderate-sized, dedicated package
chillers separate from the centralized space cooling/dehumidification loop is often a feasible and favorable
strategy for laboratories. In addition to energy savings (and associated operating cost reductions), dedicated
chillers often provide more stable control of temperature and/or pressure than central cooling networks. Where
possible, process equipment requiring cooling shall be consolidated in a single space or adjacent spaces, to reduce
the number of packaged process chillers required and/or minimize heat transfer and pressure drop losses in
dedicated chilled water network(s).
7.6 Other Systems
7.6.1 Refrigeration/Cold Storage
Residential/light commercial-sized refrigerators (i.e., those used for storing food and drinks) shall comply with the
applicable ENERGY STAR criteria. Laboratory refrigerators, freezers and walk-in coolers shall comply with AHRI
Standard 420, Performance Rating of Forced-circulation Free-delivery Unit Coolers for Refrigeration, or ANSI/AHRI
Standard 520, Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units, as applicable. All refrigerators shall
comply with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15.
Condensing units shall be fully- or semi-hermetic type, depending on the application and local environment.
Condensing units and evaporators shall be factory-assembled and UL-listed. Evaporators shall be forced-air type.
Air discharge shall be parallel to the walk-in ceiling.
Freezer evaporators shall have an automatic electric defrost system, including heater, time clock, fan delay control
and heated drain pan. The defrost shall be time-initiated and temperature-terminated, with built-in fail-safe
control. All systems shall include a pump-down cycle to provide additional protection against refrigerant surge.
Walk-in Environmental and Cold Storage Rooms
Walk-in environmental rooms are rooms in which temperature and/or relative humidity is controlled at a single set
condition within specific tolerances, regardless of activity in the room. Walk-in environmental rooms shall be
capable of maintaining a 4 ฐC (39.2 ฐF) room temperature, with a uniformity of 0.5 ฐC (0.9 ฐF) and a maximum
gradient of 1 ฐC (1.8 ฐF), unless otherwise specified. A walk-in cold storage room shall be capable of maintaining
a -20 ฐC (-4 ฐF) room temperature, with a uniformity of 2 ฐC (-3.6 ฐF) and a maximum gradient of 3 ฐC (-5.4 ฐF),
unless otherwise specified.
Walk-in environmental and cold storage rooms shall feature temperature displays visible from a contiguous
corridor, and shall be capable of producing a continuous reading of temperature (and transmitting these data to
the BAS). Alarm systems with manual override capability shall be provided to advise room operators of fault
conditions. Ventilation shall be provided if work is performed inside these rooms. Fume hoods are not permitted in
environmental rooms. Doors shall be provided with a locking mechanism capable of release at all times from the
room interior, whether or not the door is locked.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-21

-------
Walk-in environmental and cold storage rooms shall include shelving. Walk-in coolers are considered enclosed
spaces and require automatic fire sprinkler protection inside them. Refer to Chapter 10, Fire Protection, within
these A&E Guidelines for additional information. Walk-in cold storage rooms shall have oxygen sensors and alarms
to ensure that oxygen is not being displaced.
A separate refrigeration system shall be provided for walk-in cold storage and environmental rooms. If
refrigeration is provided by the building's primary chiller water system, a backup, self-contained system must be
provided.
Where necessary, cold storage rooms shall have systems to prevent formation and buildup of ice on walking
surfaces.
7.7 Plumbing and Piping
7.7.1 Water Supply Systems
General Requirements
The criteria in this section apply to plumbing systems (e.g., fixtures; supply, drain, waste, and vent piping; the
service water heating system; safety devices; appurtenances) inside the building and up to 5 feet beyond the
building exterior wall. Plumbing shall comply with the International Plumbing Code (IPC) or local plumbing code
and the ASHRAE Handbook. Access panels and cleanouts shall be provided where maintenance or replacement of
equipment, valves or other devices is necessary. Pipes shall be marked in accordance with ASME A13.1 (including
color coding) and shall conform with requirements of GSA PBS-P100 and NFPA45, as applicable.
Potable Water Supply Network
Type K copper tubing shall be used for below-grade supply piping. Type L copper tubing shall be used for above-
grade supply piping. The laboratory potable water supply shall be piped in Type K or Type L copper. For new
systems, domestic water shall be supplied by a separate service line and not by a combined fire protection and
potable water service or a combined process water and potable water system.
Fittings for Type K tubing shall be flared brass, solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for Type L tubing
shall be solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for plastic pipe and tubing shall be solvent-cemented or
Schedule 80 threaded connections. No lead solder shall be used for copper pipe in potable water systems.
Dielectric connections shall be made between ferrous and non-ferrous metallic pipe.
Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture. Accessible shutoff valves shall be provided at branches serving floors,
fixture batteries for isolation or at risers serving multiple floors. Shutoff valves also shall be provided to isolate
equipment, valves and appurtenances for ease of maintenance. Accessible drain valves shall be provided to drain
the entire system. Manual air vents shall be provided at high points in the system. Manufactured water hammer
arresters shall be provided and shall be installed in appropriate locations.
Provision for expansion shall be made where thermal expansion and contraction may cause piping systems to
move. This movement shall be accommodated by using the inherent flexibility of the piping system as designed,
loops, manufactured expansion joints and couplings.
Where domestic water or fire protection service lines enter buildings, suitable flexibility shall be provided to
protect against differential settlement or seismic activity, in accordance with the IPC and NFPA 13, respectively.
Lead-in-Potable Water
Potable water systems components, such as piping, valves, fittings, drinking fountains and fixtures, shall conform
with requirements of the EPA National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (NPDWR) for lead and copper (40 CFR
Parts 141 and 143). Components shall not be incorporated unless bearing the NSF/ANSI Standard 61 mark,
indicating that the product complies with the health effects requirements of NSF/ANSI Standard 61 for materials
designed for contact with potable water.
7-22 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Upon substantial completion of the building, the potable water system within the building, as well as the potable
water supply main, shall be tested for lead and copper content in accordance with EPA 816-B-05-008, 3Tsfor
Reducing Lead in Drinking Water in Schools—Revised Technical Guidance. Testing of the building's potable water
system and the potable water supply main shall be coordinated with the local water company, county health
department and the state environmental protection agency, as applicable.
Sterilization
New water supply systems or existing supply systems that have undergone rehabilitation will require sterilization
in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) C651, AWWA C652, applicable provisions of the
IPC, and/or applicable state and local plumbing codes.
Drain, Waste and Vent Lines
Underground lines that do not service laboratory areas shall be service weight, cast iron, soil pipe, hub-type (with
gasket). Hub-less, cast iron, soil pipe may be used in locations where piping is accessible. Above-grade lines that
are 12 inches in diameter and larger shall be either hub-less or hub-type (with gasket), service weight, cast iron
pipe. Lines less than 12 inches in diameter may be ABS pipe where allowed by the project criteria. Pipe and fittings
shall be joined by solvent cement or elastomeric seals. Cast iron soil pipe fittings and connections shall comply with
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute guidelines. Provisions for expansion shall be included, as above.
Underground lines servicing laboratory areas shall be acid-resistant sewer pipe, conforming with one of the
following, as applicable: ASTM D1785, ASTM D2241, ASTM D2447, ASTM D4101, ASTM F1412 or ASTM F2389.
Socket-type polyethylene fittings may be used for outside diameter-controlled polyethylene pipe. Pipe shall be
welded together following ANSI/American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/D1.1M, ASTM D2241 and ASTM D2855.
Trap Seal Protection
Where there is the possibility of loss of the seal in floor/funnel drain traps, a trap primer valve and a floor/funnel
drain with trap primer valve discharge connections shall be installed.
Backflow Preventers
Backflow preventers of the reduced-pressure zone type shall be provided on all domestic water and fire protection
lines serving the building.
Safety Devices
Tempering valves shall be of the fail-safe, pressure-balance type. Hot water generation equipment shall be
provided with ASME code-stamped tanks; when of sufficient capacity, water temperature or hot water input rate
shall follow applicable provisions of the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code. Approved pressure-relief devices,
such as combination temperature-pressure or separate units, shall be provided. Backflow preventers and air gaps
shall be used to prevent cross-connection (contamination) of potable water supplies. Vacuum breakers (to prevent
back-siphonage) shall be used only in conjunction with administrative controls.
Pressure-Reducing Values
Pressure-reducing valves shall be provided where service pressure at fixtures or devices exceeds the normal
operating range recommended by the manufacturer. Wherever failure of a pressure-reducing valve could cause
equipment damage or unsafe conditions, a pressure-relief valve shall be provided downstream from the reducing
valve.
Water Hammer Arrestors
Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in the following locations:
• At each elevation change of every horizontal branch to fixture batteries.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-23

-------
•	At all quick-closing automatic valves (e.g., mechanical make-up supplies, drinking fountains, flush valves,
single-lever control faucets, temperature regulating valves, dishwashers, return pumps).
•	Each floor on each horizontal main for branches with and without individual fixture or battery water
hammer arrestors, for both hot and cold water.
Water hammer arrestors shall comply with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH201, Water
Hammer Arrestors, ANSI/ASME A112.26.1M, or as required by code, and as recommended/required by the
fixture/equipment manufacturer.
De-ionized Water System
Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, the central de-ionized water system shall have a resistivity of
greater than 10 megaohms (MQ) at the tap in each laboratory. This system may be a centralized system or several
decentralized systems, depending on the requirements of the specific laboratory facility. Water quality shall
conform to ASTM Type I requirements for reagent-quality water and to American Pharmaceutical Association
requirements for water used in microbiological testing. Type I water is typically prepared by reverse osmosis, then
polishing it with mixed-bed de-ionizers (i.e., ion exchange process) and passing it through a 0.2 micron (nm)
membrane filter.
A realistic needs analysis shall be performed prior to sizing the de-ionized water system. Sizing the system to
provide water simultaneously to all purified water taps is very likely to result in a highly oversized system, resulting
in increased energy and water waste. In addition, all centralized purified water systems should recover at least
75 percent of the feed water as permeate.
Pipes and fittings for the de-ionized water system shall be polyvinylidene fluoride Schedule 80 or unpigmented
polypropylene. A bypass or drain legs shall be provided at the lowest points in the piping system to avoid
stagnation of water at the branch pipes during extended periods of non-use.
Hot and Cold Water, Nonpotable
The laboratory nonpotable water supply shall be piped in Type K or Type L copper. Approved backflow prevention
devices shall isolate the laboratory nonpotable water system from the potable water system. The hot water supply
runs shall be insulated, and hot water shall be recirculated to conserve energy where feasible.
Cu Itu re Water System
Culture water system piping shall be constructed of Schedule 80 unpigmented polypropylene and shall have no
metal in contact with the water. The holding tank shall be lined with unpigmented polypropylene. Transfer pumps
shall be of solid unpigmented polypropylene. Water shall be provided to each culture tank in constant overflow
mode to keep the tanks aerated and carry away waste products.
7.7.2 Service Hot Water
Domestic hot water supplies shall be generated and stored at a minimum of 140 ฐF, and tempered to deliver 124 ฐF
water to outlets or in accordance with IPC. Hand washing, lavatory, sink, and similar fixtures accessible to the
disabled, elderly, or children shall be tempered to deliver 85 ฐF to 109 ฐF water temperatures at the fixture or
group of fixtures. Bathing and showering fixtures (except emergency showering) shall be tempered to deliver 85 ฐF
to 120 ฐF water temperatures at the fixture or group of fixtures.
Individual fixture thermostatic mixing valves shall be provided where distributed outlet temperatures may exceed
124 ฐF. Hot water supply to dishwashers shall be at 140 ฐF, and the temperature shall be boosted from 140 ฐF to
180 ฐF for the final sanitizing rinse. Heat pump-powered hot water heaters shall be used where energy cost savings
will result.
7-24 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Solar Domestic Hot Water Heating
Solar energy systems used for domestic hot water heating shall be installed if life cycle cost-effective.
Temperature-actuated tempering valves shall be installed to ensure that scalding hot water is not delivered to
individual fixtures.
7.7.3 Water Fixtures and Fittings
In accordance with the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings, the design shall meet requirements in
ASHRAE Standard 189.1 Sections 6.3.2 (Building Water Use Reduction-Mandatory Provisions), 6.4.2 (Building
Water Use Reduction-Prescriptive Option), and 6.4.3 (Special Water Features-Prescriptive Option), except where
more stringent standards are identified below.
High-Efficiency Urinals
WaterSense labeled high efficiency urinals that operate at 0.125 gallons per flush or less shall be used.
Waterless urinals shall comply with applicable provisions of ANSI Z124.9, ASME A112.19.19 and the IPC. Liquid
refills and traps shall have minimum lives of 1,500 uses and 7,000 to 10,000 uses, respectively.
Lavatory Faucets
Lavatory faucets shall be lever-operated, push-type or electronically activated for one-hand operation without the
need for tight pinching or grasping. Drain pipes and hot-water pipes under a lavatory must be covered, insulated
and/or recessed far enough such that wheelchair-bound individuals who are without sensation will not burn
themselves.
Metered-valve faucets deliver a preset amount of water and then shut off. To control water usage, the preset
amount of water can be reduced by adjusting the flow valve. ABAAS requires a 10-second minimum on-cycle time.
Laboratory Service Fittings
Laboratory service fittings for each laboratory space are specified in the room data sheets and shall be compatible
with their intended use. All service valves, fittings and accessories shall be fabricated from cast brass with a
minimum copper content of 85 percent, except for items that are to be brass-forged or bar stock. All service
valves, fittings and accessories shall be especially designed for laboratory use. All laboratory service fittings shall
have an acid-resisting and solvent-resisting clear plastic coating applied over a clean, polished, chrome-plated
surface. Service fittings at fume hoods shall have an acid-resistant and solvent-resistant plastic coating applied
over a fine sandblasted surface.
Faucets in laboratory workspaces shall have flow no less than 2.0 gallons per minute (gpm) and no greater than
5.0 gpm, unless otherwise dictated by project requirements.
Glassware Washing Sinks
Sinks dedicated to the purpose of washing laboratory glassware shall have a high or telescoping spigot with a
swing-type gooseneck to accommodate large pieces of glassware. Large sinks shall be provided with a hand-held
sprayer whose weight is supported for ease of operation. All glassware washing sinks shall be ventilated at a rate
of 280 cfm to 300 cfm, with an exhaust air duct connection at the top of the sink below the bench top.
Showers
Shower stalls shall be of fiberglass construction, complete with door, soap ledge, showerhead, separate hot- and
cold-water knobs, non-skid floor finish, and standard 2-inch floor drain. Shower stalls shall also provide a small
change area with lockers. Shower stalls shall conform with applicable requirements of ABAAS.
Showerheads shall be WaterSense labeled and have a maximum water flow rate less than or equal to 1.75 gpm.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-25

-------
In addition, the showerhead or associated systems shall mix hot and cold water adequately to prevent scalding,
which generally occurs at a water temperature greater than 110 ฐF (or lower for sensitive populations such as
children and elderly persons).
Flow restrictors are washer-like disks that fit inside showerheads and were initially well-accepted due to their
simplicity and low cost. However, facility operators have discovered that flow restrictors provide poor water
pressure in most showerheads; hence, they shall not be used on EPA new construction and major renovation
projects.
Drinking Fountains
At least one drinking fountain shall be provided on each block of space so that no building occupant will have to
travel more than 150 feet to reach it. Self-contained, mechanically-refrigerated coolers shall be provided wherever
a need for drinking fountains exists. Ratings shall be based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 18, Methods of Testing for
Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with Self-Contained Mechanical Refrigeration. Electrical equipment shall be UL-
listed. The refrigeration coils shall not be assembled using lead solder, and all components must bear the NSF/ANSI
Standard 61 mark, indicating the components are free of lead. All drinking fountains and locations for drinking
fountains shall comply with applicable ABAAS provisions.
Self-contained drinking fountains shall meet the following specifications to minimize water consumption:
•	The unit shall be capable of operating at a nominal temperature of 70 ฐF (compared to the 65 ฐF nominal
temperature for conventional drinking fountains).
•	Fiberglass insulation (minimum 1-inch thick) shall be installed on the piping, chiller, and storage tank to
minimize heat gain and preclude condensation formation.
•	An automatic timer shall be installed to shut off the unit during evenings and weekends.
Additional requirements for drinking fountains are as follows:
•	The water storage tank shall be sized to hold at least 50 percent of the estimated hourly water demand.
•	All drinking fountains shall also be equipped with an inlet strainer that can trap particles larger than 140
Hm (or as required by local code).
•	The refrigeration system shall use non-ozone-depleting refrigerants (e.g., R-134a) and be hermetically
sealed.
•	An internal adjustable stream regulator shall maintain delivered pressure between 20 pounds per square
inch (psi) and 90 psi (or as required by local codes and standards), except for supplies that require higher
pressure.
•	The unit shall also comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A117.1.
•	The water cooler shall include a bottle filling station to fill glasses or other beverage containers.
Janitor Closet Sinks
Janitor closets for cleaning equipment, materials and supplies shall be provided on all floors. All janitor closets shall
be equipped with a service sink with hot and cold water taps. Containment drains shall be plumbed for appropriate
disposal of liquid wastes in spaces where water and chemical concentrate mixing occurs for maintenance
purposes. Permanent signage shall be affixed, indicating prohibited items for disposal (based on presence/absence
and type of onsite wastewater treatment and local sewer permit prohibitions and concentration limits).
7.7.4 Stormwater Drainage System
A complete stormwater building drainage system shall be provided for all stormwater drainage for roofs, plazas,
balconies, decks, window wells, parking structures, parking garages and similar. (Note that this does not include
stormwater managed by means of low impact development [LID] strategies). Clear water drainage (e.g., cooling
7-26 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
coil condensate drainage, evaporation pan drainage, ice makers) and similar clear, non-chemically treated drainage
shall discharge to the stormwater drainage system and not to the sanitary drainage system. In addition, unless
granted an exemption by the EPA Project Manager, all projects shall consider the efficacy of disconnecting some or
all drains from the storm drainage or sewer system, thus returning a portion or all of the total drainage for
infiltration or for onsite beneficial uses.
All projects shall comply with the EPA Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements
for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act— in particular, the instructions
regarding maintaining the pre-development volume, rate, temperature and duration of stormwater runoff at the
site after the project is completed.
Stormwater Drainage Pipe and Fittings
The stormwater and associated vent system shall be designed in compliance with applicable local codes and
standards. P-traps and house-traps shall only be provided on storm systems where required by code or by state or
local authorities. Piping shall be service-weight, cast iron soil pipe with hub and spigot fittings and joints with
elastomeric gaskets (by pipe manufacturer). Above-ground piping shall have hub-less fittings and joints (by pipe
manufacturer), within 12 inches of each side of every joint where not superseded by code.
Stormwater Vent Piping and Fittings
Storm vent piping, where required for P-traps, sumps, interceptors and separators, shall be service-weight, cast
iron soil pipe with hub and spigot fittings and joints with elastomeric gaskets (by pipe manufacturer). Above-
ground piping shall have hub-less fittings and joints (by pipe manufacturer). Where approved, Type K drain, waste,
or vent (DWV) copper piping with 95 percent tin/5 percent antimony solder joints may be used.
The EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines include minimum recycled content requirements for non-
pressure pipe (i.e., pipe that can be utilized for drainage applications).
Storm Drains
Roof drains and planter drains in non-pedestrian/vehicle areas shall have high dome strainers. Receptors, hub
drains, trench drains and similar drains shall have dome-bottom strainers (in addition to pedestrian/vehicle grate
strainers where required) to reduce splashing, increase free area and prevent blockage by debris.
Stormwater Equipment
Drains in parking structures and garages shall discharge to an oil/water/sediment separator prior to discharge to
the storm sewer when required by code, state or local authority. The drain body and frame-and-grate strainers
shall be rated for expected traffic loadings (including dynamic loads) and shall include drain adapters, extensions,
receivers, deck clamps, gravel stops and similar appurtenances, as required by the design and by local codes. The
drain strainer free area shall be equal to or greater than the free cross-sectional area of the calculated outlet pipe.
Drain strainers in pedestrian areas shall be heel-proof type. To prevent access by rodents, every drain and system
opening shall have 0.25-inch or smaller strainer openings and discharges shall be elastomeric pinch valves or
similar.
In general, drains shall be cast iron body-type with nickel-bronze strainers for finished pedestrian areas, aluminum
domes for roof drains, and ductile iron or bronze finish for unfinished pedestrian areas. Rainwater drains and
equipment room areas shall be equipped with large diameter strainers. Ramps shall be equipped with either
trench drains or roadway inlets to manage drainage. Trap primers shall be provided for P-traps (where P-traps are
required by code, state or local authority).
Sump Pumps
Sump pumps shall only be used where gravity drainage is not possible. Only rainwater, storm and clear water
drainage from the lowest floors of the building shall be connected to the sump pump; drainage from upper floors
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-27

-------
shall use gravity flow to the public sewer. Sump pumps shall be alternating duplex pumps and shall be connected
to the building's emergency power system.
7.7.5 Sanitary Wastewater System
Sanitary Pipe and Fittings
A complete sanitary building drainage system shall be provided to service all plumbing fixtures, sanitary floor
drains, kitchen equipment, and other equipment with sanitary, soil, or waste drainage/discharge.
The sanitary waste and vent system shall be designed in compliance with applicable codes and standards. Piping
shall be service-weight, cast iron soil pipe with hub and spigot fittings and joints with elastomeric gasket (by pipe
manufacturer). Aboveground piping shall have hub-less fittings and joints (by pipe manufacturer), with pipe
supports that comply with code (generally within 12 inches of each side of each joint).
Vent Piping and Fittings
Piping shall be service-weight, cast iron soil pipe with hub-and-spigot fittings and joints with elastomeric gaskets
(by pipe manufacturer). Aboveground piping shall have hub-less fittings and joints (by pipe manufacturer), or else
consist of Type K DWV copper with 95 percent tin/5 percent antimony solder joints.
Sanitary Floor Drains
Sanitary floor drains shall be provided in multi-toilet fixture restrooms, kitchen areas, mechanical equipment
rooms and locations where interior floor drainage accumulates sanitary-type wastes. Single-fixture toilet rooms do
not require floor drains. In general, floor drains shall be cast iron body type with 6-inch diameter nickel-bronze
strainers for public toilets, kitchen areas and other public areas. Receptor drain outlets shall be at least two times
the area of combined inlet pipe areas. Floor drains in equipment room areas shall be equipped with large diameter
cast iron strainers, and parking garages shall require large diameter tractor grates rated for expected wheel
loading. Trap primers shall be provided for all sanitary drains (e.g., floor drains, receptors, open site drains, hub
drains) where drainage is not routinely expected or is seasonal.
The facility system shall be plumbed such that only sanitary wastewater is managed through the sanitary sewer
system. The system shall have no connections with floor drains or drain piping that is used for the collection of
industrial wastewaters containing Clean Water Act Priority Pollutants or wastewaters that meet the definition of a
RCRA hazardous waste. Grease interceptors shall be provided for all drains and fixtures that receive fats, oils, or
grease-containing waste that are within 10 feet of the cooking battery and/or mop and service sinks in kitchen
areas, or where required by the state health department and local authorities.
All grease interceptors shall be connected to the sanitary sewer system. Grease interceptors shall be sized in
compliance with the requirements of the local sewer authority and with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard
PDI-G101. Generally, food grinders, vegetable cleaning sinks, fish-scaling sinks, meat-cutting sinks and clear water
wastes are prohibited by the local authority from extending to the grease interceptor. An individual solids
separator must be provided for fish-scaling sinks.
Oil/Water/Sediment Separator
Floor drains and/or trench drains in vehicle repair garages shall discharge to an oil/water/sediment separator prior
to discharge to the sanitary sewer. The most common configuration will consist of a triple basin system with or
without a downstream laminar-flow, parallel plate coalescing separator for moderate to heavy oil loadings.
Depending on the wastewater stream composition, additional treatment processes such as a vortex-type settling
vessel,7 activated carbon beds or skimmers may also be required prior to discharge. Discharge limits will be
specified in the applicable sewer authority pre-treatment permit. Refer to the EPA Environmental Management
Manual for additional environmental performance and compliance information.
7 For example, the vortex and oil baffle system installed to process stormwater drainage at the EPA's New England Regional Laboratory in
Chelmsford, Massachusetts.
7-28 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Automatic Sewage Ejectors
Automatic sewage ejectors shall only be used where gravity drainage is not possible. Only sanitary drainage from
the lowest floors of the building shall be connected to the sewage ejector; fixtures on upper floors shall use gravity
flow to the public sewer. Sewage ejectors shall be non-clog, screen-less, alternating duplex pumps, capable of
passing a 2-inch solid, with each discharge not less than 4 inches in diameter. They shall be connected to the
building emergency power system.
Clear Water and Non-Clear Water Drainage
Storm rainwater, cooling coil condensate drainage and similar clear-water drainage shall not discharge to the
sanitary drainage system. Chemically-treated mechanical discharge from cooling towers, boilers, chillers and other
mechanical equipment shall discharge to the sanitary sewer system. Purified steam (i.e., from humidification
processes) shall not be discharged to the sanitary sewer system.
7.7.6	Process Wastewater System
Process wastewater collection and treatment will depend on the specific facility's operations and discharge permit
requirements. In general, EPA facilities that generate process wastewater streams will be laboratories. Discharge
from shop area floor drains shall be, at a minimum, conveyed through an oil/water/sediment separator as outlined
above. In certain cases (e.g., where solvents are used or the facility is located in a watershed with strict discharge
limits), additional treatment such as chemical precipitation or activated carbon adsorption may be required to
meet discharge limits.
Process wastewater treatment systems shall be designed to achieve compliance with the required discharge
standards in (1) 40 CFR 403 or applicable local and state regulations and ordinances (for pre-treatment discharges
to POTWs); and (2) 40 CFR Parts 405-471 (for direct discharges to waters of the United States).
All non-sanitary laboratory wastewaters are required to pass through an onsite water treatment system to control
pH, as well as other chemical and/or material constituents, before discharging to a municipal sewer system and
local POTW. The system shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 40 CFR 403.5, the National Pollutant
Discharge Elimination System, and the local POTW requirements (i.e., sewer connection permits and/or pre-
treatment discharge authorizations). Refer to Section 7.9.4, Process Wastewater, within these A&E Guidelines for
information about required monitoring and measuring of process wastewater characteristics.
System components, in particular the outfall to the sewer system, must be accessible for monitoring, sampling and
maintenance. In addition, the system shall be provided with emergency power and an audible and visual alarm to
alert staff in event of non-conforming discharges.
Design of the onsite wastewater collection and pre-treatment system should consider alternatives for reuse,
recycling or other beneficial use of non-toxic wastewater streams (or waste streams that the POTW cannot accept
in its system). As one example, an onsite wetland might be used where feasible to remove heavy metals from
wastewater while also storing and filtering stormwater runoff.
7.7.7	Natural Gas Supply
Gas distribution piping shall comply with local codes and requirements. Fuel gas systems shall comply with
NFPA 54. Liquefied petroleum gas systems shall comply with NFPA 58.
Service Entrance
Natural gas service utility piping entering the building shall be protected from accidental damage by vehicles,
foundation settlement or vibration. Wall penetrations shall be above grade and provided with a self-tightening
swing joint located upstream of the building and wall penetration.
Where wall penetration above grade is not possible, the gas pipe shall be encased in a Schedule 80 black steel,
corrosion-protected, sealed and vented, gas pipe sleeve that extends from 10 feet upstream of the building wall
penetration exterior (or excavation shoring limits if greater) to 12 inches (minimum) downstream of the building
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-29

-------
wall penetration. Gas piping shall not be placed in unventilated spaces, such as trenches or unventilated shafts,
where leaking gas could accumulate and result in an explosion.
Gas piping shall not be run in any space between a structural member and its fireproofing. Pipelines shall be
labeled in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200. Local gas utility and code requirements shall be followed.
Gas Meter Regulators
To avoid placing any strain on the gas piping, any meters, regulators or similar attachments shall be adequately
supported. Any vents or rupture discs on the equipment shall be vented to the exterior of the building.
Shutoff Valves
Earthquake-sensitive shutoff valves shall be provided for each gas entry, where required by local code.
Gas Piping within Building Spaces
Gas shall not be piped through confined spaces, such as trenches or unventilated shafts. All spaces containing gas-
fired equipment, such as boilers, chillers, water heaters and generators, shall be mechanically ventilated and
include automated methane detectors and alarms connected to the BAS. Vertical shafts carrying gas piping shall be
ventilated. Gas meters shall be located in a ventilated gas meter room, thus avoiding leakage concerns and
providing direct access to the local gas utility. All gas piping inside ceiling spaces shall have plenum-rated fittings,
and no gas valves (whether concealed or accessible) shall be installed above ceilings. All diaphragms and regulators
in gas piping must be vented to the outdoors.
Requirements concerning natural gas supply and distribution systems for laboratories are contained in Section
7.7.9, Laboratory Gas Storage and Distribution Systems, within these A&E Guidelines.
7.7.8	Fuel Oil Storage and Supply
Fuel Oil Piping Systems
Fuel oil piping systems shall be double-walled containment pipe (pipe-in-pipe) when indoors, outdoors, or buried,
and shall be Schedule 40 black steel or black iron piping. Fittings shall be of the same metal or alloy as the pipe
material. Valves shall be bronze, steel, or iron and shall be screwed, welded, flanged, or grooved. Duplex fuel oil
pumps with basket strainers and exterior enclosures shall be used for pumping fuel oil to fuel-burning equipment.
Underground Fuel Oil Storage Tanks
Underground fuel oil storage tanks (USTs) shall be of double-walled, non-metallic construction (e.g., fiberglass), or
contained in lined vaults. USTs shall be sized for actual storage volume for sufficient capacity to provide a
minimum of 48 hours of system operation under emergency conditions (72 hours for remote locations). Consider
installing additional capacity, where appropriate/feasible, in areas subject to extended power losses or operational
disruption due to severe weather events. A monitored and alarmed liquid and vapor leak detection system shall be
provided in the interstitial space between the two tank walls. Vaults shall be equipped with monitoring wells
and/or sumps. Each UST system shall also have an automatic leak detection probe that continuously measures the
liquid level—and hence volume—of product in the tank and provides a local visual or printed readout, as well as a
data signal to the BAS. Each UST shall be equipped with a spill catch basin and an overfill sensor that triggers a
visual/audible alarm, consistent with 40 CFR 280.
Aboveground Fuel Oil Storage Tanks (AST)
In accordance with the secondary containment requirements in 40 CFR 112 and NFPA 30, all ASTs shall be double-
walled and equipped with an interstitial sensor similar to USTs. ASTs shall be equipped with overfill alarms similar
to USTs. (Note that ASTs may need to meet additional requirements based on the facility's SPCC plan, as required
by 40 CFR 112. Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual for additional specifications on SPCC plans.)
7.7.9	Laboratory Gas Storage and Distribution Systems
Systems for flammable and non-flammable gas storage and distribution must meet the following requirements.
7-30 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
General Requirements
Special gas services for flammable and non-flammable gases shall be provided to all laboratories requiring their
use. Gases shall be stored and piped in accordance with the following standards:
•	N FPA 45, Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals.
•	NFPA 50A, Standard for Gaseous Hydrogen Systems at Consumer Sites.
•	N FPA 50B, Standard for Liquefied Hydrogen Systems at Consumer Sites.
•	NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.
•	NFPA 55, Compressed Gases and Cryogenic Fluids Code.
In situations not covered by NFPA code, the Compressed Gas Association shall be consulted for guidance. No
piping from any of these systems shall be run above or in the exit access corridors.
Gas cylinders for non-flammable gases, both in-use and standby, shall be manifolded and distributed from an area
that is located as far as possible from frequently used and occupied areas of the building, as well as accessible from
either the central storage area or directly from the loading and receiving dock area.
This space shall be designed and ventilated in accordance with applicable code requirements.
Flammable gas cylinders shall be exposed at the point of use only and shall otherwise be housed in approved
cabinet enclosures that are mechanically ventilated to the atmosphere and equipped with leak detection
monitoring devices and visible/audible alarms.
Before acceptance, all gas distribution systems must be pressure-tested for tightness and purged. The required
level of purity specified at the point of use shall be maintained at all points in the system during testing and
purging.
Distribution Systems
For all laboratories except metals analysis laboratories, a seamless copper piping gas distribution system for non-
flammable gases shall be provided to all designated laboratory workspaces. Ideally, the length of the gas
distribution lines should not exceed 100 feet to avoid the necessity for pipe joints. If pipe joints are required due to
line length, prior approval by the EPA Project Manager is required. Regulator valves, pipe sleeves and other
auxiliary equipment required to furnish gas at the required pressures shall be provided.
Pipe sizes shall be selected to ensure that the pressure delivered at the point of use (i.e., after line and fitting
losses) is adequate for the application. The number and type of gas outlets in each room will be indicated on the
room data sheets. Exact and final outlet locations in each laboratory must be approved by the EPA Project
Manager during the design phase. The system design shall include a capability for individual room cut-off.
Distribution Systems for Metals Laboratories
For all laboratories used for metals analysis, a double-walled piping system, consisting of seamless Teflon" piping
inside a larger-diameter PVC containment pipe, shall be installed. For the inner pipe, alternatives to Teflon"
construction may be utilized if approved by the EPA Project Manager. Pipe sizes shall be selected to ensure that
the pressure delivered at the point of use (i.e., after line and fitting losses) is adequate for the application.
Bottle Gas Supply
The bottle gas supply shall be provided with duty and standby sets with automatic change-over valves and
controls. For all gases, an indicator panel shall be installed close to the point of use in each of the laboratories. The
distance between the point of use and the panel shall not exceed 75 feet.
When toxic or explosive gases and/or simple asphyxiants are used in a confined space, a multi-point gas analyzer
and alarm system shall be provided to monitor concentration of the gases within this space. This system shall
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-31

-------
consist of gas sensors/transmitters, wiring, and a microprocessor-based monitoring-and-alarm control panel linked
with the BAS. The number and type of sensors and transmitters shall depend on the specific application.
Each sensor/transmitter shall transmit a frequency signal proportional to the gas concentration and shall have a
special amplifier to eliminate the effects of radio frequency interferences. The control panel shall be capable of
monitoring and providing an alarm on different types of gases in different zones and shall have an audible and a
visible alarm. The control panel shall also have a factory-wired terminal strip to interface with the BAS for remote
monitoring and alarms.
Liquid Nitrogen and Liquid Argon
Liquid nitrogen and liquid argon must be delivered to the point of use in liquid form. Insulation in the delivery
system must be sufficient to prevent evaporation losses of liquid nitrogen. The gas distribution room for these two
gases shall be as close as possible to the laboratory rooms where the gases are used, preferably adjacent to them.
This inert gas distribution room shall also be directly accessible from the outside of the building without use of the
laboratory corridors. One large tank for each gas shall be provided; each tank shall be permanently fixed in the
room. The tanks shall be outfitted with necessary valves and controls, as required by the gas supplier.
The Project A/E shall determine whether an oxygen meter should be installed in confined areas or small areas
where liquid nitrogen and/or argon are stored, distributed or transferred. An example of a calculation tool can be
found at http://www.oxigraf.com/technical support.html. The Project A/E shall assume that 100 percent of the
liquid nitrogen or liquid argon is released into the space.
Natural Gas Distribution System
Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each laboratory facility must have a natural gas distribution
system. Refer to Section 7.7.7, Natural Gas Supply, within these A&E Guidelines for natural gas distribution system
requirements.
Compressed Air Systems
Where compressed air systems are required, these systems shall be provided with oil and water traps, a dryer, and
all necessary controls and appurtenances. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each compressed air
system shall have duplex compressors (i.e., one redundant compressor), with an automatic lead/lag switch and a
single compressed air tank. Compressed air systems for processes shall be completely independent of any existing
pneumatic systems for HVAC controls.
The compressed air system shall include a water trap and pressure regulator(s) at each laboratory room or area.
An audible alarm and remote annunciation shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of air pressure. Air
compressors shall be equipped with vibration pads and springs as required to diminish vibration and sound
generated by compressors. In addition, compressor locations should be selected so as to minimize transmission of
vibration and sound to the building or rooms that the compressors service.
Vacuum Systems
Where a laboratory vacuum system is required, it shall consist of several vacuum pumps capable of evacuating air
at a regulated suction of 25 inches of mercury or as specified in the project criteria. Unless otherwise specified in
the project criteria, each vacuum system shall have duplex pumps, an automatic lead/lag switch and a single tank.
An audible alarm and remote annunciator shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of vacuum.
Vacuum pumps shall be air-cooled, dry vacuum pumps. Vacuum pumps shall also be equipped with vibration pads
and springs as required to substantially reduce vibration and sound generated by the pumps. Furthermore, the
pump location should be selected so as to minimize transmission of vibration and sound to the building or rooms
that the pumps services.
7-32 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
7.7.10 Emergency Eyewash Units and Safety Showers
Emergency Eyewash Units
Emergency eyewash units or combination eyewash/safety shower units shall be provided in all work areas where,
during routine operations or during foreseeable emergencies, the eyes of an individual may come into contact with
a substance that can cause corrosion, severe irritation, or permanent tissue damage, or that is toxic by absorption.
At least one eyewash, initiated by a single action, shall be provided within every laboratory space, or for every two
laboratory modules.
Eyewash units shall be designed to flush both eyes (double-headed unit) simultaneously and to provide hands-free
operation. The eyewash units shall provide protection of the nozzle area with pop-off covers and other protective
features to prevent contamination of the flushing system. Design, operation, flow, water temperature and similar
characteristics shall meet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1. Water for the units shall be supplied by the potable water
system. The temperature of flushing fluid for the emergency units shall be tepid (between 60 ฐF and 95 ฐF).
Emergency eyewash units shall be provided with sanitary drains. Discharge from emergency eyewashes should not
impinge on powered electrical equipment.
Eyewash units shall be in accessible locations that require no more than 10 seconds to reach. Their location in all
laboratory spaces shall be standardized as much as possible. Units shall be placed in a location away from potential
sources of hazard (e.g., fume hoods) and near the exit door. The location shall be well-lighted and clearly identified
with a highly visible sign. Safety equipment must meet ABAAS accessibility requirements.
Emergency Safety Showers
Emergency safety shower units shall be provided in areas where, during routine operations or during foreseeable
emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive, severely irritating to the
skin or toxic by skin absorption. Each safety shower unit shall be equipped with an installed flexible hand-held
drench hose with a spray head similar to that used in hand-held eyewash units; this shall be mounted on a rack. All
piping for the emergency safety showers shall be above the ceiling, except for the showerhead and pull bar
connection. Discharge from emergency showers should not impinge on powered electrical equipment.
Design, operation, flow rates and similar characteristics shall meet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1. Water for shower
units shall be supplied by the potable water system. The temperature of flushing fluid for the emergency units
shall be tepid, 60 ฐF to 95 ฐF. Rigid pull bars of stainless steel should be used to activate the shower and should
extend to within 54 inches of the floor. The floor area of the emergency safety shower shall be textured, well-lit
and identified with a highly visible sign.
Location of safety showers shall be standardized as much as possible. Emergency safety showers in laboratories
generally shall be located at the room entrance on the right-hand side of the exit door (hinge side). Instrument
laboratories and laboratory support spaces shall have showers located in the corridor at the pull side of the room
door. Safety showers shall be provided in accessible locations that require no more than 10 seconds to reach from
hazard locations, preferably inside or just outside the door of each laboratory work area. Safety showers should be
no more than 50 feet travel distance from the hazard source. Safety equipment must meet ABAAS accessibility
requirements. Refer the EPA Safety Manual for additional information.
Emergency safety showers located on the hinge side of exit doors must be clear of the door swing and at least 6
feet away from any electrical devices (e.g., switches, outlets, panels). Laboratory walls adjacent to the showers
shall be water- and mold-resistant construction (e.g., mold-resistant gypsum, paperless gypsum board or coated
with a waterproof coating).
The EPA recommends that modesty curtain(s) be provided at each safety shower location.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-33

-------
7.8 Energy and Water Metering
7.8.1	General Requirements for Advanced Metering
All newly installed meters must be advanced meters, which are meters that measure and record interval data at
least hourly and transmit measurements to a remote central collection point at least daily. In addition, existing
meters should be upgraded to advanced meters during major renovations.
The EPA has an enterprise-level energy management information system (EMIS) that collects data from advanced
meters installed at EPA facilities. To transmit data to the EPA's enterprise-level EMIS, each facility shall have one or
more remote terminal units (RTUs) installed that transmit data via meter mail to one of the EPA's Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol servers, which in turn transmit the metered data to a third party-hosted data collection server.
The Project A/E shall coordinate with the EPA Project Manager to determine which meters and submeters should
be connected to the RTU(s) and the appropriate configuration of the RTU(s).
In addition, metered data must be available for use locally at the facility. All installed meters shall be compatible
with the installed control system, be provided with signaling devices and seamlessly interface with the installed
BAS. Refer to Chapter 9, Building Automation Systems, within these A&E Guidelines for additional information.
Where feasible, the Project A/E should consider opportunities to obtain output data from utility-provided revenue
meters. In some cases, a digital pulse signal output from the utility-owned revenue meter may be sent to both the
installed BAS and an EPA-owned RTU for transmission to the EPA's enterprise-wide EMIS.
For additional information about metering best practices, see DOE's Metering Best Practices: A Guide to Achieving
Utility Resource Efficiency.
Installation and Calibration
All meters and submeters shall be installed and calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
Meter installation shall include calibration reports and point-to-point testing to ensure successful integration into
EPA's enterprise-level EMIS, where applicable. The Project A/E shall coordinate with the EPA Project Manager and
EPA Information Technology (IT) Administrators when integrating meters into the the EPA's enterprise-wide EMIS
to ensure proper metering hardware configuration.
The Project A/E shall include manufacturer's O&M requirements for all metering hardware in the project plans and
specifications. In cases where meter maintenance would require critical system shut-down, a double block, bleed,
and lockable bypass arrangement shall be installed to facilitate service, removal, and replacement. Additionally, for
purposes of security, meters should be installed in lockable cabinets or be provided with tamper-proof transmitter
enclosures.
7.8.2	Energy Meters
Where consumed, building-level energy meters must be installed for electricity, natural gas, steam, chilled water
and high-temperature hot water. Exceptions are noted as follows:
•	Per DOE's Federal Building Metering Guidance, building-level energy meters are not required for buildings
less than 5,000 square feet, warehouses less than 25,000 square feet or food service/sales buildings less
than 1,000 square feet. Buildings larger than these thresholds that do not have heating/cooling or other
significant loads do not require building-level energy meters.
•	Meters for steam, chilled water and high-temperature hot water are only required if these commodities
are delivered to the building from a district energy system or central utility plant.
Electric Meters
Electric meters shall adhere to the following standards:
•	ANSI C12.1, American National Standard for Electric Meters—Code for Electricity Metering.
7-34 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
ANSI C12.7, American National Standard for Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets.
•	ANSI C12.18, American National Standard for Protocol Specification for ANSI Type 2 Optical Port.
•	ANSI C12.19, American National Standard for Utility Industry End Device Data Tables.
•	ANSI C12.20, American National Standard for Electricity Meters—0.1, 0.2, and 0.5 Accuracy Classes.
•	ANSI C12.22, American National Standard for Protocol Specification for Interfacing to Data
Communication Networks.
Electric meters shall be capable of reading and collecting the following data over 15-minute time intervals:
•	Cumulative real power consumption (kWh).
•	Real power demand (kW).
•	Apparent power demand (kVA), average of three-phase total measured over the same demand interval as
the real power demand.
•	Reactive power demand (kVAR), average of three-phase total measured over the same demand interval
as the real power demand.
•	Power factor, average of three-phase total measured over the same demand interval as the real power
demand.
Electric meters shall be capable of providing the following instantaneous measurements:
•	Active (Real) Power (kW)—per phase and total.
•	Apparent Power (kVA)—per phase and total.
•	Reactive Power (kVAR)—per phase and total.
•	Active (Real) Energy (kWh).
•	Apparent Energy (kVAh).
•	Reactive Energy (kVARh).
•	Power Factor—per phase and total.
•	Voltage (L-L, L-N)—per phase and total.
•	Current—per phase.
Natural Gas Meters
To help ensure accurate measurement of the mass of natural gas consumed, natural gas meters shall be equipped
with temperature compensation devices and installed downstream of pressure regulation devices. Natural gas
meters shall be calibrated to the pressure resulting from the upstream pressure regulator. Meters shall comply
with all applicable American Petroleum Institute (API) standards and be rated for accuracy within 2 percent.
Natural gas meters shall be capable of reading and collecting therms and volumetric flow (cubic feet and hundred
cubic feet [CCF]) over 15-minute time intervals.
Steam Meters
Steam meters shall be true mass flow type meters containing a packaged temperature compensation device.
Steam meters shall be capable of reading and collecting total mass flow (pounds, for accuracy within 2 percent)
over 15-minute time intervals, and flow rate (pounds per minute, pounds per hour) and temperature (ฐF)
instantaneously.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-35

-------
High-Temperature Hot Water and Chilled Water Meters
High-temperature hot water and chilled water meters shall be capable of reading and collecting calculated energy
consumption (Btu) over 15-minute time intervals, and supply temperature (ฐF), return temperature (ฐF) and flow
rate (gpm) instantaneously.
7.8.3	Water Meters
Building-level potable water meters must be installed at all buildings, except those that are less than 5,000 square
feet or expected to use less than 1,000 gallons of water per day. Permanent irrigation systems that provide water
for landscaped areas equal to or larger than 25,000 square feet must be metered separately from indoor domestic
water consumption.
Liquid flow meters shall be magnetic, turbine type, ultrasonic or other type approved by EPA. Flow meter accuracy
shall be within ฑ 2 percent. The pressure drop across the flow meter shall not exceed 5 pounds per square inch
gauge (psig) under maximum flow conditions. Wherever possible, a straight, unobstructed length of at least 10
pipe diameters shall be provided upstream of the flow meter and a similar straight, unobstructed run of at least 5
pipe diameters shall be provided downstream of the flow meter. Water meters shall be capable of reading and
collecting total volumetric flow (gallons and CCF) over 15-minute time intervals, and flow rate (gallons per minute)
instantaneously.
7.8.4	Other Fuel Meters
Flow meters for other fuels (e.g., fuel oil, biodiesel, propane) shall comply with API standards and shall be capable
of reading and collecting total volumetric flow (gallons) over 15-minute time intervals, and flow rate (gpm)
instantaneously.
7.8.5	Sub-metering
All sub-metered data shall be automatically fed to the BAS for archiving and report generation.
Electricity
Sub-metering shall be considered for lighting (interior and exterior), chillers, motors, and pumps.
Data Centers
In the EPA's data centers, advanced meters shall be installed and properly located to enable the measurement of
PUE as defined by the Green Grid white paper, "PUE: A Comprehensive Examination of the Metric." The EPA
Project Manager will provide further guidance regarding the EPA's desired PUE measurement level, which will
impact the location for meters measuring IT equipment energy and the configured measurement interval.
Water
Individual equipment and subsystems that could consume more than 1,000 gallons of water per day shall be
equipped with flow-totalizing submeters.
Solar Heating Systems and Solar Domestic Hot Water
Where solar heating systems and/or solar domestic hot water systems are installed, adequate sub-metering shall
be installed to enable the EPA to monitor the performance and energy consumption of each system.
7.9 Other Measuring and Monitoring
7.9.1 Flow Meters for Air in Ducts
Wilson Grids (or similar airflow measuring grids) are required for all central AHUs. Measuring grids shall be
provided at the supply air duct, return air duct and the outside air duct. Airflow measuring grids must be sized to
give accurate readings at minimum flow. In some instances, it may be necessary to reduce the duct size at
individual measuring stations to enable accurate measurement. Each grid shall be equipped with a pressure
7-36 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
transducer linked with the BAS. Liquid-filled and/or electronic manometers to provide onsite readouts are
optional.
Refer to Section 7.2, Ventilation Systems, within these A&E Guidelines for air duct requirements to guide the
selection and placement of flow meters for air in ducts.
7.9.2	Temperature and Pressure Sensors
Each piece of mechanical equipment shall be provided with the instrumentation or test ports to measure and
verify temperatures and pressures. These shall consist of permanently installed, calibrated sensors, such as
pressure gauges, pitot tubes, manometers, thermometers, and/or thermocouples to accurately measure pressures
and temperatures. Thermometers and pressure gauges are required on the suction and discharge of all pumps,
chillers, boilers, heat exchangers, cooling coils, heating coils and cooling towers.
Pressure and temperature sensors shall comply with the requirements contained in Chapter 9, Table 9-1
Guidelines for DDC Systems, within these A&E Guidelines. Local chart recorders shall be installed where specified
by the EPA.
7.9.3	Air Stack Monitoring
Air stack monitors shall be installed where applicable to measure releases of air pollutants, consistent with a
permitted state synthetic minor source or Title V major source. Additional detailed information on stack
monitoring will be contained in a facility's air emissions permit issued by the state or local environmental agency
having jurisdiction.
7.9.4	Process Wastewater
The system shall have the capability of automatic, continuous monitoring and recording of wastewater discharge
flow, pH and other constituents to conform with local POTW requirements. This typically will include continuous
reading meters (e.g., for pH and temperature), and auto-composite samplers that collect hourly samples over a 12-
or 24-hour period, for subsequent laboratory analyses.
7.10 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Mechanical Systems
The Construction Contractor shall retain an independent TAB contractor to balance, adjust, and test air-moving
equipment and the air distribution system, water system, gas system, and compressed air piping systems, as
applicable. The independent contractor shall be an organization that is a member of the AABC and/or the NEBB.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements 7-37

-------
This page intentionally left blank.
7-38 Chapter 7. Mechanical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
8. Electrical Requirements
8.1 General Requirements
8.1.1	Design Calculations
The Project A/E shall provide:
•	Calculations that show the available short-circuit currents at each bus and the voltage drop for each major
cable run.
•	Load flow calculations, including step loads, for switchgear, switchboards, panelboards and motor control
centers.
•	Inrush current calculations on all motor loads for commercial and emergency generators.
•	Product and photometric data sheets for all lighting fixtures specified in the design and lighting
calculations.
•	Arc flash calculations, as well as a list of key risk areas and estimated hazard risk category, and a
description of efforts made to reduce or mitigate arc flash issues.
•	Supporting calculations and design solutions related to harmonic management for all large VFD and pulse
width modulated (PWM)-controlled devices.
For any electrical generation assets, the Project A/E shall include electrical engineering calculations and design
documentation that support integration with existing loads in the building and on the site as a whole.
8.1.2	Electrical Studies and Testing
The Project A/E shall include in the specifications requirements for a short circuit and coordination study to be
provided by an independent testing agency. For minor projects, the Project A/E shall determine the need for either
study and document findings in the Basis of Design Report. The Project A/E shall modify the standard specification
to conform to the project requirements. The following requirements shall be added to the standard coordination
study specification: "Plots shall include the ground fault protective device settings along with the other
overcurrent settings. Plots, which include ground fault protective devices, shall also include a typical 20-ampere
downstream circuit breaker and a sampling of other downstream devices to show where coordination exists or
does not exist between devices. Ground fault settings shall attempt to coordinate with downstream devices to the
maximum extent practicable."
All major items of electrical equipment shall be tested in accordance with National Electrical Testing Association
(NETA) and NFPA 70, National Electrical Code standards by an independent testing agency. The specification
section for each item of major equipment shall indicate the NETA section that specifies the testing to be
performed. The Project A/E shall determine the appropriateness of all components of the tests and shall modify
the standard test, if deemed appropriate. Testing specification for switchgear and switchboards shall require that
the NETA standard for switchgear and switchboards have the section relating to inspection of bolted connections,
replaced with the following: "Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance. Check tightness of all
bolted electrical connections by using a calibrated torque wrench. Each bolt shall be individually tested and
individually marked to indicate that it has been tested. Refer to manufacturer's instructions or NETA Acceptance
Testing Standards for proper torque levels."
For electrical systems with functions that are not adequately covered by the above standard tests, such as control
systems, the Project A/E shall determine and specify system tests required and the acceptance criteria. NETA
Section 8 "System Function Tests" shall be used as the basis of this requirement. The Project A/E shall reference a
specific test code or procedure. If none is available, the Project A/E shall either:
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements 8-1

-------
•	Provide and include in the specifications a test procedure to verify proper operation of the system; or
•	Provide and include in the specifications lists of the functions that are to be tested, and require the testing
organization to determine the appropriate testing procedures and submit them for approval.
8.1.3	Electrical Installations
Electrical installations shall maintain the integrity of fire stopping, fire resistance, fire separation, smoke control,
zoning and other structurally oriented fire safety features in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101, Life Safety
Code.
8.1.4	Demand-Side Management Systems
A demand-side management system to keep the peak demand of the facility below a predetermined level shall be
evaluated. An economic analysis to determine the payback on such a system shall be performed. This system, if
feasible, shall have the capability to follow the demand variations as an operator (or an automated software
package) manually switches the loads.
8.1.5	Coordination of Work
A coordinated set of documents (i.e., coordination between architectural, electrical, HVAC, plumbing, equipment
and structural systems for bidding) shall be provided. Documentation shall clearly identify the division of work
among the trades and delineate the coordination responsibilities of the contractor. Special attention shall be given
to designed-in equipment and equipment to be provided by the facility occupants.
8.1.6	Power Factors
The Project A/E shall design the facility's electrical system so as to assure that the overall power factor of the
entire electrical installation is a minimum of 90 percent. This power factor may be achieved by selection of
electrical utilization equipment with individual power factor ratings that would render the required facility power
factor or through the installation of power factor correction devices to meet the overall facility power factor
requirement. The Project A/E shall assure that certain groups of inductive loads, such as motors of 5 hp and above,
fluorescent lighting fixtures, transformers, etc., are equipped with power factor correction at an individual level so
that combined, the overall facility power factor will be attained. All required power factor correction devices shall
be switched with the utilization equipment, unless doing so results in an unsafe condition. High-speed switching
devices, especially PWM VFDs, generate harmonic currents that could cause voltage distortion that could, in turn,
create adverse conditions to the power system, including low power factor. Although harmonics are difficult to
detect absent surveys and investigation, once they are detected, various filters can be applied to mitigate them.
These methods include but are not limited to low-pass and tuned trap filters or line reactors that act as DC chokes.
8.2	Service Capacity
Incoming transformers must be provided, as required, and must be of sufficient capacity to accommodate the full
design load plus 30 percent. To the greatest extent possible, public utility transformers shall be located outside of
the actual building. If public utility transformers must be located within buildings because of site constraints, they
shall be installed in standard transformer vaults conforming to the requirements of NFPA 70. These vaults shall not
be located adjacent to, or directly beneath, any exit from the building. In calculating the design load, a demand
factor of 100 percent shall be used for lighting and fixed mechanical equipment loads and a demand factor of
75 percent for all other loads.
8.3	Interior Electrical Systems
8.3.1 Basic Materials and Methods
The design of the electrical distribution system (both normal and emergency power) shall take into account the
effects that harmonics from nonlinear loads can produce on the system. Harmonics from nonlinear loads can affect
the capacities of the neutral conductor, panelboards, phase conductors and emergency generators. "K" rated
8-2 Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
transformers shall be used where the associated panelboards are feeding a large quantity of nonlinear loads.
Special attention shall be given to the harmonics produced by VSD and VFD units used for control of HVAC
equipment.
8.3.2	Laboratory Power Requirements
Laboratory requirements shall be coordinated with the specified EPA laboratory SME.
8.3.3	Records Storage Facilities and Areas
Records storage facilities and areas shall be designed in accordance with 36 CFR 1234.
8.4	Lightning Protection
8.4.1	Scope of Design
A lightning protection system shall be provided for all facilities containing laboratory modules, as well as for
facilities containing radioactive or explosive materials or facilities having research or communication
towers/antennas. The requirements and installation criteria for lightning protection systems shall be in accordance
with NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; UL 96A, Standard for Installation
Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems; and the local building code.
For building types not in the above description, the guide in NFPA 780 shall be used to assess the risk of loss due to
lightning.
8.4.2	Master Label
For buildings or facilities with a strong risk potential (per NFPA 780), equipment, accessories and material
necessary for a complete master-labeled lightning protection system for all building components shall be furnished
and installed. The system shall comply with NFPA 780, UL 96A and Lightning Protection Institute 175. All cables,
lightning rods and accessories shall be copper. All connections and splices shall be of the exothermic weld type.
The installed system shall be unobtrusive, with conductors built during construction (so they are concealed). The
system shall also be properly flashed and watertight. Installation shall be done in conformance with shop drawings
prepared by the supplier and approved by the EPA.
Before the lightning protection system is accepted, the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the supervising
architect the UL master label or an equivalent certification.
8.5	Cathodic (Anti-Corrosion) Protection
An investigation shall be conducted and a determination made on whether cathodic protection is required for
buried utilities. The Project A/E shall justify in writing the need or lack of need of a cathodic protection system for
the type of construction and equipment specified for each specific buried utility. This evaluation shall be submitted
with the first submission. If a cathodic protection system is required, a system shall be recommended to satisfy the
local conditions.
The cathodic protection system shall be designed by a professional who is certified by NACE International as a
Cathodic Protection Specialist or Corrosion Specialist or who is a registered professional corrosion engineer.
Additionally, the design professional must have a minimum of 3 years' experience with similar installations. The
cathodic protection design, as a minimum, shall comply with the applicable NACE International standard
corresponding with the type of structure that is to be cathodically protected. The installed cathodic protection
system shall be able to provide protective currents to the intended structure meeting the minimum performance
criteria as defined in NACE International standards.
Any existing metallic underground storage tanks (USTs) shall be cathodically protected; new USTs must be
fiberglass or non-metallic construction. Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual for additional
requirements concerning USTs.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements 8-3

-------
8.6 Lighting Systems
The Project A/E must meet the Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings, ENERGY STAR, and FEMP
requirements for energy efficiency, daylighting, and lighting controls, and any other federal, state, or local
sustainable building requirements. The lighting design shall comply with the recommendations in The Lighting
Handbook published by the Illuminating Engineering Society.
Occupancy/vacancy lighting sensors shall be provided for appropriate spaces, including, but not limited to, offices,
conference rooms, restrooms, locker areas and storage rooms. For offices, conference rooms and other non-
support rooms, the occupancy sensors shall be manual on/automatic off type. Occupancy sensors shall be located
so they (1) have a clear view of the room or area they are monitoring; and (2) minimize instances when the lights
are turned on by movement outside of the room.
Lighting systems and locations shall be selected to reduce glare at seated or standing working levels.
8.7 Secondary Power Systems
Secondary power systems shall be designed and provided for all administrative and laboratory spaces as required
by code or directed by the EPA. Secondary power loads are categorized based upon the intended end use and shall
be designated based upon type, class and level as defined by NFPA 110 and NFPA 70. All secondary power systems
shall comply with NFPA 37, 70,101,110 and 111 and Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 446.
Acceptance testing of generators shall follow NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems.
If an emergency generator will ever be grid-tied, or if it will run in parallel with the grid, that generator shall
comply with IEEE 1547, NFPA 70 and the serving electric utility's interconnection standards. Legally required/life
safety generators may be designed to operate in parallel with the local utility, thus allowing for load shedding and
smart grid and intelligent building initiatives. Before designing emergency generators for peak shaving purposes,
local, state and federal authorities must be contacted, due to the need for possible noise, air quality permitting
and additional hardware requirements.
The class must be a minimum of 72, which is the minimum time in hours for which the secondary power system is
designed to operate at its rated load without being refueled. Where a standby generator supplies a switchboard,
power may be distributed from the switchboard to the legally required/life safety emergency, legally required
standby and facility necessary backup systems, in accordance with Figure B.l (a) and B.l (b), NFPA 110.
Generators are not specifically required by these code sections unless an analysis of the cost of installation and
maintenance of acceptable secondary power sources shows that a generator is the most cost-effective power
source. However, local circumstances may indicate a generator as the only or most practical option. Regardless of
the outcome of the design analysis for secondary power, the EPA may require generator(s) to supply power.
Diesel fuel and natural gas are permitted as energy sources for building emergency generators, However, if natural
gas/propane is selected for Level 1 and critical action facilities that may be located in areas where the probability
of fuel interruptions is high (due to earthquakes, floods, poor utility reliability or operational/facility
requirements), a risk assessment (e.g., probability and consequences) shall be developed that analyzes these types
of parameters. This assessment shall also address issues such as block loading limitations, building height, seismic
zone, continuity of tenant mission requirements, facility security, etc. The EPA Project Manager will make the final
determination as to the fuel source assessment that will be utilized.
If possible, locate the generators outside and on grade. If installed outdoors, they must be provided with a suitable
walk-in acoustic enclosure and jacket water heaters to ensure reliable starting in cold weather. If critical action
structures must be located within a floodplain, generators shall be elevated above the 500-year base flood
elevation.
When installed at high altitudes or in areas with very high ambient temperatures, the generators must be derated
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Operation of starting batteries and battery chargers
must also be considered in sizing calculations. In humid locations, heaters can reduce moisture collection in the
8-4 Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
generator windings. Critical silencers are required for all generators. Acoustical treatment of the generator room
must be provided as necessary. Temperature and ventilation must be maintained within the manufacturer's
recommendations to ensure proper operation of the unit. Calculations to support the size of the intake air supply
for combustion, cooling and radiation, as well as exhaust piping and exhaust paths, must be provided by the
mechanical engineer.
Radiators must be unit-mounted if possible. If ventilation is restricted in indoor applications, remote installation is
acceptable. Heat recovery and load shedding must not be considered. The remote location of radiators must be
designed to avoid excess pressure on the piping seals.
A permanently installed load bank, sized at a minimum of 50 percent of generator rating, must be provided. The
load bank may be factory-mounted to the radiator. Care should be taken in selecting materials that will tolerate
the high temperatures associated with radiator-mounted load banks to include belts, flex connections, motors,
sprinkler heads, etc.
For diesel generators, the load bank shall provide a load add/shed feature that will maintain load levels at a
minimum, including building load, of the generator manufacturer's recommended loads when operating at
50 percent of generator kW name plate. The load bank shall have a minimum of four automatic load taps
controlled by a load add/shed relay incorporated into the run circuit on the generator.
The engine generators must be sized to serve approximately 150 percent of the design load and to run at a
maximum of 60 percent to 80 percent of their rated capacities after the effect of the inrush current declines. When
sizing the generators, the initial voltage drop on generator output due to starting currents of loads must not
exceed 15 percent. Day tanks must be sized for a minimum capacity of four hours of generator operation. Provide
direct fuel oil supply and fuel oil return piping to the on-site storage tank. Piping must not be connected into the
boiler transfer fuel oil delivery "loop."
Care must be exercised in sizing fuel oil storage tanks by taking into account that the bottom 10 percent of the
tank is unusable and that the tank is normally not full (normally at a 70 percent level) before the operation of the
generator.
Generator alarms must be provided on the exterior wall of the generator room. All malfunctions must be
transmitted to the BAS. In all buildings, with or without a BAS, a generator alarm annunciator must be located
within the fire command center. The generator output breaker must have a contact connected to the BAS
indicating output breaker position, to allow annunciation of the open position on the BAS.
Automatic transfer switches serving motor loads must have in-phase monitors (to ensure transfer only when
normal and emergency voltages are in phase) to prevent possible motor damage caused by an out-of-phase
transfer. They must also have pretransfer contacts to signal time delay returns in the emergency motor control
centers.
Automatic transfer switches must include a bypass isolation switch that allows manual bypass of the normal or
emergency source to ensure continued power to emergency circuits in the event of a switch failure or required
maintenance.
The generators and the generator control panel must be located in separate rooms or enclosures.
To readily identify all receptacles and electrical outlets that are part of the secondary power system, each
receptacle and the associated cover plates shall be red in color. In addition, the cover plate shall have a
professional quality label attached that identifies the circuit and the device number on that specific circuit.
All new emergency generators must be monitored by the fire alarm system for the following supervisory
conditions: Generator Running, Generator Fault and Generator Common Trouble. In addition, the generator
controllers must include the NFPA 110 required generator monitoring and output contacts.
When a generator is installed, a mushroom-type disabling switch shall be installed adjacent to the fire alarm
annunciator panel. If the facility does not have a fire alarm system or annunciator, this switch shall be located at
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements 8-5

-------
the main entrance to the facility. The switch shall also be provided with a plastic cover to prevent accidental
activation of the switch. This location is the normal/traditional point that fire department personnel responds to at
the facility. If the fire department needs to disable the generator to gain control of the utilities, it must be easily
recognizable and accessible. Placing the switch in an electrical room and expecting fire department personnel to
have institutional knowledge of that location is unacceptable. Additional switches can be installed for maintenance
and facility personnel, but not in lieu of the switch at the fire alarm annunciator.
8.7.1	Legally Required/Life Safety Emergency Power
Per NFPA 110, life safety emergency power shall be considered Level 1 systems. Level 1 systems shall be installed
where failure of the equipment to perform could result in loss of human life or serious injuries. Level 1 systems are
intended to automatically supply illumination or power, or both, to critical areas and equipment in the event of
failure of the primary supply or in the event of danger to elements of a system intended to supply, distribute, and
control power and illumination essential for safety to human life. The system shall provide electric power in the
event of loss of normal power and shall provide power for emergency and egress lighting. The transfer of power
shall be within 10 seconds or a Type 10.
Legally Required/Life Safety Emergency Power Loads
Loads requiring dedicated emergency power supply are specified by NFPA 70, NFPA 101 and some local building
codes. Automatic switching schemes shall be provided for all emergency power sources. Where emergency
generators are used, their installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 110 and NFPA 70, Article 700. Distribution
for loads shall be located in separate vertical sections of switchgear or switchboards or in dedicated panels.
Examples of life safety loads required by NFPA 70 to meet Article 700:
•	Fire alarm systems.
•	Exit signs and means of egress illumination.
- Emergency lighting system: 3 footcandles minimum for egress, 10 footcandles at switchboards.
•	Emergency and public safety voice/alarm communication systems.
•	Automatic fire detection systems.
•	Electrically powered fire pumps and jockey (pressure maintenance) pumps.
•	Industrial processes where current interruption would produce serious life safety or health hazards; some
of these processes may require uninterruptible power supply (UPS) power.
•	Essential ventilating where failure could result in serious life safety hazards.
•	Occupancies with silane gas.
•	Emergency circuits.
•	Emergency source (generator).
•	Transfer switches.
•	Emergency panels.
8.7.2	Legally Required Standby Power
Per NFPA 110, legally required standby power systems shall be considered Level 2 systems. Level 2 systems shall
be installed where failure of the Secondary Power System to perform is less critical to human life and safety.
Level 2 systems typically are installed to serve loads when stopped due to any interruption of the primary electrical
supply, could create hazards or hamper rescue or firefighting operations. Legally required systems shall meet all
requirements in NFPA 70 Article 701. These systems shall transfer power within 60 seconds as a Type 60.
8-6 Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Legally required standby power loads include, but are not limited to the following:
•	Smoke control systems.
•	Accessible means of egress platform lifts.
•	Power and lighting for the fire command center.
•	Certain HVAC and exhaust systems (as required by applicable state and local codes and as directed by the
EPA Project Manager).
•	Critical sump pumps and other associated mechanical equipment and controls.
•	BAS, if supporting legally required systems.
•	All animal care facilities.
•	Local HVAC air compressors for special rooms.
•	Selected elevators (as required by applicable state and local codes and as directed by the EPA Project
Manager).
•	Generator auxiliaries.
•	Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)-required aircraft obstruction warning lights.
•	UPS serving technology/server rooms that serve legally required communications systems.
•	Storage battery (required to carry load for 1.5 hours).
•	Generator set.
•	Fuel cell.
•	Exhaust fan in UPS battery rooms.
•	Power and lighting for Fire Command Center and Security Control Center.
•	Heating and refrigeration systems for legally required systems.
•	High-rise stairway pressurization fans.
•	Elevator machine room lighting, HVAC and power.
•	Emergency responder radio coverage.
•	Visitor screening equipment.
•	Telephone switches and fiber cable battery systems.
•	Security systems.
•	Drinking water booster pumps (high-rise buildings).
•	Sewage ejector pumps.
8.7.3	Facility Necessary Backup Power
Based upon the mission of the facility, certain equipment may need power to continue mission critical operations
or to support an orderly shutdown process but do not impact the life safety of the occupants. These systems are
defined in NFPA 70 Article 702.
•	General areas of the buildings.
•	Horizontal sliding doors.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements 8-7

-------
•	UPS serving technology/server rooms.
•	Selected heating and refrigeration systems.
•	Selected refrigerators and freezers (as directed by the EPA Project Manager).
•	Air-conditioning systems associated with computer rooms, UPS rooms and environmental rooms.
•	Boiler, hot water pumps, perimeter HVAC units and any other ancillary heating equipment necessary to
freeze-protect the building.
•	BAS, if not supporting legally required standby or life safety systems
•	Optional non-egress lighting.
•	Industrial processes.
•	Receptacles and emergency lighting in large conference rooms to facilitate command and control
operations during an emergency situation.
•	Other equipment as directed by the EPA not required by codes.
8.7.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies
A UPS system shall be provided for loads requiring guaranteed continuous power or a Type U. The application of
UPS systems shall comply with IEEE 446 and NFPA 111. The Project A/E shall make a recommendation concerning
the appropriate type of system for a particular facility (i.e., rotary or stationary [static] type). UPS equipment shall
be capable of supplying power through multiple means (e.g., normal, static switch bypass, total system bypass).
The UPS system shall be sized according to the criticality of the area served, with a minimum of 5 minutes of
protection upon loss of normal power or a Class 0.083. The UPS system shall be rated for "multi-range" input
voltage and shall provide a sinusoidal or, as a minimum, a quasi-sinusoidal power output wave form. Total system
bypass power shall include an isolation transformer. All components shall be UL-listed. The supplied UPS system
shall be specified to operate properly with an emergency generator.
8.8 Telecommunications Systems and Spaces
8.8.1	General Requirements
Telecommunications infrastructure shall meet applicable Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) standards, including the following:
•	TIA/EIA-568 Set, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Set.
•	TIA/EIA 569, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
•	TIA/EIA-607, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises.
If the building is located in an area susceptible to severe weather and flooding, place telecommunications
equipment in centrally located areas above the local design flood elevation or 3 feet above the base flood
elevation (whichever is higher), avoid placing telecommunications equipment in below-grade spaces where water
is most likely to enter, and run wiring and cables along ceilings—not floors—wherever possible.
8.8.2	Local Area Network/Telecommunications Rooms
Each EPA-occupied floor shall have at least one enclosed, lockable local area network (LAN)/telecommunications
room with slab-to-slab drywall partitions. The building's LAN/telecommunications rooms shall be vertically
stacked.
8-8 Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
LAN/telecommunications rooms shall meet the following requirements:
•	Size: The preferred room dimensions are 10 feet by 10 feet. Actual size will depend on the building
occupancy and need.
•	Equipment: Each room will house communications equipment racks, switches and, if required,
supplemental cooling units.
•	Sleeves: Each room shall house an integral cable riser pathway consisting of four 4-inch sleeves, including
two that may be designated for the use of the EPA's security systems.
•	Cable Support: Where needed, ladder runways shall be provided that are 18 inches wide by 4 inches deep
trapeze and suspended from the ceiling slab at 8 feet above the finished floor.
•	Use Restrictions: Non-EPA building management systems and other base building service panels shall not
be housed in these rooms. The EPA's security system panel, if required, may be housed in these rooms.
•	Location Restrictions: Telecommunications rooms shall not be located directly adjacent to potential
sources of electromagnetic interference (e.g., electrical switchgear, transformers, mechanical equipment
rooms, large pumps); stairwells; elevator shafts; or other elements that would preclude access to, and
cable distribution from, the rooms. Their location must not be proximate to potential sources of flooding,
such as supply or drain lines, toilets, janitor's closets, etc. No pipes intended for fluids or gas shall
transition through these rooms.
•	Architectural and Finishes: Rooms shall be enclosed with slab-to-slab walls with a minimum 1-hour fire
rating. Install a 4-foot by 8-foot sheet of 0.75-inch thick fire-rated plywood (unpainted), with a fire rating
stamp on the visible side. The ceiling shall be exposed to the slab above, and the slab shall be sealed to
reduce dust. The flooring shall be slab and sealed with a static dissipative coating; raised floors shall only
be used if adjacent spaces have raised floors.
•	Doors: Room doors shall be 36 inches wide by 96 inches high, open outward with 180ฐ hinges, have
automatic door closers and be lockable with proximity card reader access control.
•	HVAC: Room temperature and relative humidity must be maintained at 90 ฐF ฑ 2 ฐF and 50 percent ฑ
5 percent, respectively, on an ongoing basis. If required to maintain temperature and humidity, dedicated
HVAC units shall be provided and be up flow and/or down flow units. The Project A/E shall verify specific
equipment heat loads and other requirements for each room prior to finalizing design. Supply air shall be
introduced to the rooms to provide for the code required outside air.
•	Lighting: Light fixtures shall provide 50 footcandles measured at 3 feet above the finished floor and shall
be connected to the standby power system.
•	Electrical: The electrical load shall be assumed to be 50 watts/ft2, and all technical power shall be
connected to the UPS. 120V AC quad outlets shall be provided on each wall and be connected to the
standby power system. UPS outlets shall be provided as required and connected to the central
telecommunications UPS. Install a grounding 0.25-inch by 4-inch by 10-inch copper bar on insulated
standoffs. The grounding bar shall be wall mounted in the room per TIA 607.
8.8.3 Computer Center
Depending on the building occupancy and need, the facility may have a Computer Center. The Computer Center
shall be located centrally within the EPA's occupied space. The Computer Center shall be isolated from
interference caused by high voltage transmission lines and radio transmission facilities. The Computer Center must
have a ceiling with a minimum of 9 feet of clearance above the finished floor. An ABAAS-compliant accessible ramp
shall be provided for access to this area, if there is a change in floor level. Access to the Computer Center from the
loading dock shall be sufficiently wide and structurally adequate to handle the future replacement of the large,
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements 8-9

-------
heavy equipment contained within. Depending on the facility's needs, the Computer Center may be comprised of
one or more of the following rooms to be sized to accommodate the anticipated equipment:
•	Main Computer Room: The Main Computer Room houses all file servers and other centralized computer
equipment, including associated server racks, telecommunications racks, power distribution units/UPSs,
computer room air handler/computer room air conditioning units and workbenches. The room shall be
alarmed and secured, with access via card reader. The HVAC system serving this room shall be separately
zoned and available 24 hours per day, seven days per week. Standby power capacity for this room shall be
provided for all equipment and necessary functions, including power, lighting and HVAC. The Main
Computer Room shall be located above grade and preferably away from exterior walls.
•	Burn-in Room: The Burn-in Room provides an area for IT personnel to run, test and repair various IT
equipment. Workbench space and shelving is needed, as well as some enclosed storage cabinets. The type
and quantity of equipment that will be tested is likely to require a level of cooling and exhaust beyond
that normally provided to typical office spaces, but does not need to be available 24 hours per day, seven
days per week. The room shall be adjacent to the Main Computer Room.
•	Storage Room: The Storage Room will be used for the temporary storage of IT equipment scheduled for
repair, burn-in or installation, as well as the permanent storage of associated parts and other IT
appurtenances.
The Computer Center shall meet the following requirements:
•	Architectural and Finishes: The Main Computer Room shall be enclosed with slab-to-slab walls with a
minimum 1-hour fire rating. The floor shall be a clean structural floor. No pipes (e.g., water, waste, fuel)
are permitted to run overhead through the Main Computer Room and Burn-in Room.
•	Doors: The doors leading to the Main Computer Room and Burn-in Room shall be 4 feet wide or standard
double doors with secure card reader access.
•	HVAC: The Main Computer Room must have HVAC provided 24 hours per day, seven days per week, with
N+l redundancy. Room temperature and relative humidity must be maintained at 90 ฐF ฑ 2 ฐF and
50 percent ฑ 5 percent, respectively, on an ongoing basis. Air provided to the Main Computer Room must
be filtered with MERV 13 filters.
•	Electrical: Electrical power and distribution for this space shall be sized based on the actual computer
equipment to be used. All technical power shall be connected to the UPS. Dedicated circuits shall be
provided for UPS and power conditioning equipment. Adequate distribution of 120V and 240V receptacles
shall be provided, and all outlets shall be connected to the standby power system. An emergency power
off (EPO) switch with a 15-second delay, controlling the mechanical system and the computer equipment
circuits, shall be installed 3 feet above the finished floor within 1.5 feet of the exit door. Install a
grounding 0.25-inch by 4-inch by 10-inch copper bar on insulated standoffs. The grounding bar shall be
wall mounted in the room per TIA 607. Use signal reference grids in all raised floor areas.
8.8.4 Sound Masking
A sound masking system shall be considered when the facility already has, or is installing, a building-wide public
address system. The EPA does not require sound masking systems at all facilities; the EPA Project Manager shall
coordinate with appropriate representatives from the affected facility to decide whether installation of a sound
masking system is necessary and, if so, to develop the system's requirements.
8-10 Chapter 8. Electrical Requirements Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
9. Building Automation Systems
A BAS will be required for all new facilities and major renovations of existing facilities. Smaller projects shall be
evaluated on a case-by-case basis to determine the need for—or suitability of—a BAS. The following factors shall
all be considered in the decision to specify and install a BAS:
•	Size of the building.
•	Number of pieces of equipment.
•	Complexity of equipment and systems.
•	Potential magnitude of energy savings.
•	Availability of properly trained and experienced personnel.
The BAS at new facilities or those that have undergone major renovations will have a high degree of intelligent
building functions including:
•	Data retrieval, storage and manipulation.
•	Self-diagnostic capabilities.
•	Three-dimensional building information modeling capabilities.
The EPA's Office of Environmental Information has identified the BAS as a potential cybersecurity vulnerability. The
GSA has developed policy and guidance to address this security vulnerability, including the Technology Policy for
PBS-Owned Buildings Monitoring & Control Systems, the GSA PBS FMSP Smart Building Technology Guide and the
GSA PBS FMSP Smart Building Technology Guide. The EPA also has specific guidance; contact the EPA Project
Manager for details.
9.1 Direct Digital Control Network
The BAS shall be an interconnected network of DDC systems supervised by a central computer. The BAS shall
possess a fully modular architecture, permitting expansion through the addition of stand-alone control units,
modular building controllers, unitary controllers, digital point units, multiple point units, terminal equipment
controllers, operator terminals and control computer(s). DDC signals shall be arranged to precisely sequence
heating valves, dampers and cooling valves without overlap. Unless otherwise specified, sequenced devices will
have a separate DDC output for each device; spring range sequencing will not be permitted. In addition, each
start/stop function shall be controlled from a separate DDC output. DDC controllers shall be electronic (unless
pneumatic controls would provide greater energy efficiency and/or speed of response).
Standard control functions that use open-loop logic (i.e., without feedback to related systems and indirect control
logic) are inappropriate in BAS control sequences, which instead require closed-loop control logic to assure
feedback to related systems.
The BAS shall utilize "open" communication protocols, such as Building Automation and Control Networks
(BACnet), LonWorks™ or equivalent, to minimize the costs of providing integration and allow interoperability
between building systems and control vendors. Other open protocol language systems, such as LonTalk™, may also
be used provided there is compatibility with overall regional and/or central monitoring and control systems and
strategies. The BAS shall include energy management and monitoring software. The BAS shall have a graphical user
interface (GUI) and offer the following features:
•	Trending.
•	Scheduling.
•	Capability to download memory to field devices.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems 9-1

-------
•	Real-time, live graphics programs.
•	Parameter changes of properties.
•	Set point adjustments.
•	Alarm/event information.
•	Confirmation of operators.
•	Execution of global commands.
The BAS shall be designed and installed to provide master control over all building systems and functions. Based on
project requirements, the EPA may require that one or more of the following systems be operated by control
panels and networks that are independent from the BAS:
•	Lighting.
•	Fire alarms.
•	Security.
•	Elevators.
The BAS system shall coordinate with, but not limited to, the following systems:
•	Heat recovery systems.
•	Thermal energy storage systems.
•	CO sensors.
•	Confined space gas sensor alarms.
•	Metered and sub-metered data analysis and storage.
•	Methane detectors for gas-fired equipment.
•	UST leak detection.
Table 9-1 contains guidelines for DDC systems, which may be modified depending on project-specific
requirements.
Table 9-1: Guidelines for DDC Systems
Control Parameter
Range of Control
Sensitivity
Display
Space Temperature
50 ฐF - 85 ฐF
ฑ 1.0 ฐF
Nearest 0.5 ฐF
Duct Temperature
30 ฐF - 130 ฐF
ฑ 1.0 ฐF
Nearest 0.5 ฐF
Heated or Chilled WaterTemperature
40 ฐF - 280 ฐF
ฑ 1.0 ฐF
Nearest 0.5 ฐF
Duct or Building Static Pressure
Design-Specific
ฑ 25% of Range
Nearest 0.01 inches of water column
Space Relative Humidity
10% - 90%
ฑ 3%
Nearest 1%
Duct Humidity
0% -100%
ฑ 5%
Nearest 1%
A BAS requires measurements at key points in the building system to monitor part-load operation and adjust
system set points to match system capacity to load demand. Table 9-2 and Table 9-3 list the minimum control
points and monitoring parameters for typical HVAC systems and equipment.
9-2 Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Table 9-2: Minimum Control Points for HVAC Systems
System Component
Control Points
Alarms
AHUs and Terminal Boxes
(Constant Volume and
VAV)
•	Start/stop supply and exhaust fans
•	Heating control
•	Cooling control
•	Humidification control
•	Supply air volume reset
•	Adjustable supply air volume (VAV)
•	Static pressure reset
•	Zone temperature reset (each zone)
•	Zone pressurization control (each
building zone)
•	Damper position (economizer)
•	Enable/disable economizer cycle
•	C02 concentration
•	Terminal unit damper position
•	Space pressure or CFM offset (laboratory
spaces)
•	Fan failure
•	Zone space temperature rise of 5 ฐF
above set point
•	Zone relative humidity of 5 percent
below set point
•	Freeze-stat activation
•	High and low static pressure cut-outs
•	High humidity limit
•	Space pressure above or below offsets
•	CFM above or below offsets
Chillers
•	Start/stop
•	Leaving water temperature reset
•	Isolation valve position
•	Failure
•	Chilled water temperature rise of 5 ฐF
above set point
•	Chilled water pump failure
•	Release of refrigerant
Hot Water Boilers
•	Start/stop
•	Leaving water temperature reset
•	Isolation valve position
•	Hot water decrease of 5 ฐF below set
point
•	Hot water pump failure
•	Common boiler failure point
Cooling Towers
•	Start/stop
•	Leaving water temperature reset
•	Isolation valve position
•	Fan speed
•	Fan failure
•	Backside cooling loop pump failure
•	Basin heater cutout
Pumps
•	Start/stop
•	Differential pressure reset
• Pump failure
Other
Not applicable
•	Water on floor of Mechanical Room
•	Laboratory fume hood sash position and
hood alarm condition
Table 9-3: Minimum Monitoring Parameters for HVAC Systems
System Component
Monitoring Parameters
AHUs and Terminal Boxes (Constant
Volume and VAV)
•	Supply air temperature
•	Return air temperature
•	Mixed air temperature
•	Leaving chilled water temperature
•	Entering chilled water temperature
•	Leaving hot water temperature
•	Entering hot water temperature
•	Temperature and humidity in each zone
•	Fan speed
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems 9-3

-------
System Component
Monitoring Parameters

•	Differential pressure across filter(s)
•	Supply airflow rate
•	Exhaust airflow rate
•	Outside air intake flow rate (AHUs)
•	Room or zone C02 concentration
•	Damper position
•	CFM offset (laboratories and vivaria)
Chillers
•	Leaving water temperature
•	Entering water temperature
•	kW draw
•	Leaving water flow rate
Hot Water Boilers
•	Leaving water temperature
•	Entering water temperature
•	Leaving water flow rate
•	Btu draw
Steam Boilers
•	Leaving water temperature
•	Entering water temperature
•	Leaving water flow rate
•	Btu draw
•	Flue gas temperatures
•	Steam pressure
Cooling Towers
•	Entering water temperature (from condenser)
•	Leaving water temperature (to condenser)
•	Backside cooling loop water temperature (in)
•	Backside cooling loop water temperature (out)
•	Fan speed
•	Basin heater temperature
Pumps
•	Differential pressure
•	Liquid flow rate
Utilities
•	Natural gas consumption
•	Electricity consumption
•	Electricity demand
•	Make-up water consumption
•	Fuel oil consumption
•	District-supplied hot water
•	District-supplied chiller water
•	District-supplied steam temperature and pressure
Fume Hoods (laboratories) and
Ductwork
•	Fan start/stop
•	Static and dynamic pressure
•	Volumetric flow rate (cfm)
•	Fume hood face velocity
•	Fume hood sash position
The system shall be capable of logging all data listed above or a subset of these parameters selected by building
operators. In all new buildings and major renovations, the BAS shall have at least 20 percent spare capacity for
future expansion. The system must provide for stand-alone operation of subordinate components. The primary
operator workstation(s) shall have a graphical GUI. Stand-alone control panels and terminal unit controllers shall
have hand-held or fixed, text-based user interface panels.
9-4 Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
9.1.1	Control Computer Hardware Requirements
Control computer hardware shall consist of, at a minimum, one portable (laptop) workstation/tester and one
central workstation/tester. All hardware shall have the capabilities to:
•	Run DDC diagnostics.
•	Load all DDC memory resident programs and information, including parameters and constraints.
•	Display any point in engineering units for analog points or status for digital points.
•	Control any analog output or digital output.
•	Provide an operator interface, contingent on password level, allowing the operator to use full English
language words and acronyms, or an object-oriented GUI.
•	Display and modify database parameters.
•	Accept DDC software and information for subsequent loading into a specific DDC (provide all necessary
software and hardware required to support this function, including an ANSI/EIA/TIA 232-F port).
•	Disable and enable each DDC.
9.1.2	Building Automation System Controllers
BASs generally rely on network controllers that communicate to a server and control edge devices. These
controllers are generally the system engines, making the majority of the control decisions. The following apply for
all BAS controllers:
•	BASs shall be 100 percent DDC systems, utilizing a server, controller, edge device hierarchy.
•	BAS controllers shall be programmed to maintain schedules, set point and normal operation control in
cases of network connection loss. Network connection loss scenarios shall be tested and verified as part
of the commissioning process for any BAS.
•	BAS controllers should be capable of storing data and uploading data in case the server connection is lost.
•	BAS controllers should host graphics or terminal interfaces to allow for direct connection and control from
a workstation for emergency control. This could be accomplished over Internet Protocol, serial or USB
connections.
•	BAS controllers should have embedded tools or means to direct connect that allow for troubleshooting or
programming in cases of communication loss. Means to "direct connect" to building system controls could
include Internet Protocol, serial or USB connectivity options.
•	BASs are subject to fire protection/life safety requirements (e.g., fire alarm systems may permit read-only
data interchange with, but may not share control infrastructure with, other BASs).
9.1.3	Building Automation System Software
The BAS person-machine interface (PMI) software is the major influence in complex situations, such as the
handling of trouble calls and alarms reported by the BAS. These calls are a complicated mix of:
•	The type of call/alarm.
•	The criticality of the alarm.
•	The individual(s) required to respond.
•	The time of day.
•	The troubleshooting ability of the respondent.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems 9-5

-------
• The comfort level that the respondent to the call feels toward the PMI, which is the major variable in the
response to alarms and trouble calls.
All required software to operate the BAS (including all DDC functions) shall be furnished as part of the complete
DDC system. Updates to the software shall be provided upon commercial release and incorporated into O&M
manuals, as part of the required technical support for the software products.
In accordance with GSA PBS-P100, any BAS software systems must follow IT requirements. These requirements
include:
•	All Internet Protocol addressable devices must complete the scan and remediation process.
•	All networking infrastructure (switches, routers, servers and workstations) must be government
furnished.
•	BAS software must be installed in the EPA environment, including server software, client software and any
additional tools needed for management and control of the system. This includes system update tools,
network management tools and any software that is used to make changes to the controllers.
•	BAS software shall be compatible with the most current version of required standard software and all
operating system and database software updates (i.e., Microsoft Server, Linux, SQL, etc.)
•	BAS software must be capable of trending and exporting data.
•	BAS software shall have multiple user level controls, including administrator, programmer and users.
These user levels shall be capable of an audit to determine operator's use.
•	BAS software credentials shall be unique for every user.
•	BAS software shall be installed with a minimum number of licenses needed for system use. In cases of
virtual environment installation, the number of licenses required should consider offsite users.
•	BAS client software shall have point-and-click graphics, configured for system operators, unless a unified
user interface is included in the project scope.
•	BAS software licenses shall be software licenses and not rely on a physical license key or dongle.
•	BAS must be licensed to the EPA. End user license agreements (EULA) must be approved prior to
installation onto equipment.
9.1.4 Wireless Sensor Technology
Installation of wireless sensor technology should be considered for control, metering and monitoring devices. The
primary components of a wireless sensor data acquisition system include:
•	Sensors.
•	Signal conditioners.
•	Transmitters.
•	Repeaters (optional).
•	At least one receiver.
•	Computer (if data processing is planned).
•	Connections for external communications to users (e.g., building operators).
Table 9-4 lists common wireless sensor types and the applications for which they shall be considered.
9-6 Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Table 9-4: Wireless Sensor Types and Applications
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Topology and
Communications
Applications
Power Source
900
Point-to-multipoint;
serial-FHSS
•	Building temperature sensing
•	Electric power metering
•	Building security
•	Temperature sensors—battery
powered
•	Receivers—line powered with 24
VAC power supply
•	Repeaters—line powered with
battery backup
Point-to-point and
point-to-multipoint;
serial
•	Remote monitoring with long-
distance communication
•	Building to building communication
•	Remote facility monitoring
• 11 VDC to 25 VDC from power
supply connected to line power
2,400
Point-to-point;
serial
• Temperature, humidity and other
parameter monitoring
• 10 VDC to 30 VDC from power
supply connected to line power
900 and 2,400
Mesh network
• Temperature, humidity, occupancy
and other building parameters
• Battery-or line-powered
Cellular
Network Bands
Point-to-point and
point-to-internet
• Monitoring of electrical power use
and other critical parameters
• Battery-or line-powered
FHSS - frequency-hopping spread spectrum; MHz - Megahertz; VAC-volts, alternating current; VDC - volts, direct current
9.1.5	Design Considerations
The design submittal shall include complete control system drawings, complete technical specifications and sample
commissioning procedures for each control system that is in turn a component of the BAS. The control logic, once
in place, dictates the efficacy of the BAS. Potential opportunities for optimization of the system include, but are
not limited to:
•	Device/system start/stops.
•	Temperature resets.
•	Temperature setbacks.
•	Operation schedules.
•	Control loop tuning.
9.1.6	Point Naming Conventions
In accordance with GSA PBS-P100, all new construction, energy savings performance contracts (ESPCs), or repairs
and alterations shall utilize a point naming convention for standardization of point naming. The term "point" is a
generic description for the class of object represented by analog and binary inputs, outputs, and values either
physical or virtual. All systems shall use this naming convention and process, and point naming shall be consistent
through system drawings, records, files and documents.
9.1.7	Laboratories
BAS control requirements for unique and diverse laboratory environments have additional considerations and
requirements.
Proper location of sensors is critical in a laboratory environment to avoid potential performance deficiencies,
malfunction or damage. For example, temperature sensors can usually be installed in locations where chemicals
are used and/or surfaces are routinely sanitized. In contrast, humidity sensors can be very sensitive to chemicals
and must be protected from normal sanitizing procedures.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems 9-7

-------
Laboratory ventilation shall be monitored either directly with flow sensors or indirectly with pressure differential
sensors in ductwork or between adjacent areas. Fan motors shall be equipped with current monitors and alarms
that indicate impending failure of the motor. Humidification monitoring can be provided within the duct system or
in various areas of the laboratory where humidity ratio is critical. To ensure isolation of laboratory operations (and
potential hazards thereof), sensors shall be installed to monitor the differential pressure between the laboratory
space and the support space.
Certain laboratory operations may require cooling water on a routine and/or emergency basis. In those situations,
appropriate sensors and controls shall be installed to enable delivery of cooling water, as required.
Animal room environmental conditions (e.g., temperature, humidity, ventilation airflow) must be monitored
consistent with applicable safety and animal welfare standards. Environmental monitoring systems in animal
rooms should be combined with automatic watering, through-flush and access control system packages, where
feasible.
9.2 Automatic Controls
Pre-programmed and stand-alone single or multiple loop microprocessor proportional integrative derivative
controllers shall be used to control all HVAC and plumbing subsystems.
9.2.1	Temperature Controls
All chillers, boilers, terminal boxes, and AHUs shall have self-contained BACnet or LonWorks controllers (or
equivalent) that can communicate with the BAS. Heating and cooling energy in each zone shall be controlled by a
thermostat or temperature sensor located in that zone. Independent perimeter systems must have at least one
thermostat or temperature sensor for each perimeter zone.
Temperature inputs shall be a signal from resistance temperature detector (RTD) elements or precision
thermistors, depending on cost and the accuracy required by the application. Temperature sensors using RTDs
should include platinum elements. In systems and applications with high time constants (e.g., large rooms and
laboratories), temperature sensors shall be thermistors as opposed to RTDs.
A 5 ฐF dead band shall be used between independent heating and cooling operations within the same zone.
Simultaneous heating and cooling (i.e., conditioning the space by reheating or re-cooling supply air or by
concurrently operating independent heating and cooling systems serving a common zone) shall not be used,
except under the following conditions:
•	Renewable energy sources are used to control temperature and/or humidity.
•	Project-specific temperature, humidity, or ventilation conditions require simultaneous heating and
cooling to prevent space relative humidity from risk above space-specific or facility-specific requirements
(e.g., specialized laboratory spaces).
•	Project-specific building construction constraints prohibit installation of other types of HVAC systems.
(The EPA must review these cases and provide pre-approval.)
Night set-back and set-up controls must be provided for all comfort conditioned spaces, even if initial building
occupancy plans are for 24-hour operation. Morning warm-up or cool-down, as applicable, must be part of the
control system. Controls for the various operating conditions must include maintaining building-specific
pressurization requirements (e.g., negative pressurization of laboratory spaces). An occupancy override "ON"
control must be made available for occupants via the thermostats or as scheduled through the building operator.
9.2.2	Humidity Controls
Summer and winter space or zone humidity control shall be provided only on a space-by-space or zone-by-zone
basis.
9-8 Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Indoor and outdoor humidity sensors shall be calibrated in place during system startup, and at least annually
thereafter. Dew point control is preferred, because it tends to ensure more stable humidity levels. However,
relative humidity sensors are acceptable, provided they have been calibrated in place and that they are co-located
with dry bulb sensors (i.e., such that the BAS can convert the two signals to a dew point value for control
purposes).
9.2.3	Ventilation Controls
All supply, return and exhaust ventilation systems shall be equipped with automatic and manual controls that
enable shutdown of fans when ventilation is not required. To prevent introduction of outside air when ventilation
is not required, these systems shall also be provided with manual, gravity-operated, or automatic control of
dampers for outside air intake and exhaust or relief. Systems that circulate air shall be provided with minimum
outdoor air damper position control to ensure that the minimum amount of outdoor air necessary to meet
ventilation requirements (ASHRAE Standard 62.1 or project-specific criteria) is being introduced into the system.
Unless otherwise required by life safety or the specific project criteria, automatic dampers shall fail open for return
air and fail to a minimum setting to outside air.
Unless otherwise specified based on project requirements, automatic air control dampers must meet the
ANSI/AMCA Standard 500-D. The dampers shall be opposed-blade type for modulating control, but may be
opposed-blade or parallel-blade type for two-position control. Pilot positioners and operators shall be located
outside of the air stream.
The BAS must allow complete monitoring, control, and set point adjustment of all points and VAV terminal unit
controllers. Outside air quantity to each AHU shall be automatically controlled to meet the requirements of
ASHRAE Standard 62.1.
VAV systems shall be designed with sensors and feedback control devices that sense ductwork static air pressure
and velocity pressure, and that control supply fan airflow and static pressure output by modulating the input
frequencies on the VFD motors (ASHRAE Standard 62.1).
These control systems shall have a minimum of one static pressure sensor mounted in the ductwork downstream
from the fan(s) and one static pressure controller to vary fan output by adjusting the frequency inputs to the VFD
motors and fan drives. Exhaust fans, supply fans, and return or relief fans shall have devices that control fan
operation such that:
•	Air volume output of the fan(s) is continuously monitored.
•	Supply air volume to the space constantly meets, or has the capability to exceed, the fixed minimum
outdoor air ventilation requirements.
9.2.4	Fire and Smoke Detection and Protection Controls
All air handling systems shall be provided with smoke and fire protection alarms and controls, in accordance with:
•	NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
•	NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
•	NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
•	IBC.
•	GSA PBS-P100.
•	Applicable state and local building codes.
Per NFPA 90A, smoke detectors are not required for fan units whose sole function is to remove air from the inside
of the building to the outside of the building. All supply, return, relief and exhaust air ventilation systems shall have
interlock controls that interface with the fire and smoke detection system controls. In the event of fire, these
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems 9-9

-------
interlock controls shall either turn off or selectively operate fans and dampers to prevent the spread of smoke and
fire through the building, as required by NFPA 90A.
Special exhaust systems shall be designed to include fire and smoke safety controls required by NFPA 91. Kitchen
exhaust ductwork systems shall be designed to include all fire and smoke safety controls required by NFPA 96.
Engineered smoke pressurization and evacuation systems shall comply with the following:
•	NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
•	NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
•	NFPA 92B, Standard for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Spaces.
•	ASHRAE/Society of Fire Protection Engineers, Principles of Smoke Management.
•	ASHRAE Handbook— HVAC Systems and Equipment.
•	IBC.
•	Applicable state and local building codes.
Special hazard protection systems that initiate an alarm shall be in accordance with the provisions in Chapter 8,
Electrical Requirements, and Chapter 10, Fire Protection, within these A&E Guidelines.
9.2.5	Cooling Tower and Water-Cooled Condenser System Controls
Cooling tower controls shall conform with NFPA 214, Standard on Water-Cooling Towers. Design of cooling tower
fans shall use VSDs where feasible (or, if not feasible, two-speed motors and on/off controls) to reduce power
consumption while maintaining required condenser water temperatures. Bypass valve control shall be provided, if
required, to mix cooling tower water with condenser water in order to maintain the temperature of entering
condenser water at the appropriate low limit. To decrease compressor energy use, condenser water temperature
shall be allowed to "float," as long as the temperature remains above the lower limit required by the chiller(s). The
design shall provide basin temperature-sensing devices and, if the cooling tower is operated under freezing
conditions, additional heat and control system components to maintain cooling tower sump water temperatures
above the freezing point. The cooling tower shall also be equipped with an overflow alarm that indicates when
water is flowing through the overflow drain.
9.2.6	Simultaneous Heating and Cooling
The BAS shall be designed to minimize the use of reheat in varying humidity conditions and to support
minimization of winter cooling requirements. In general, the BAS shall not be configured so as to control comfort
conditions within a space by reheating or re-cooling supply air, or by concurrently operating independent heating
and cooling systems to serve a common zone. Exceptions may be made, but only under the following
circumstances:
•	Project-specific temperature, humidity or ventilation conditions require simultaneous heating and cooling
to prevent space relative humidity from rising above special, space-specific requirements.
•	Project-specific building construction constraints (as established in the project requirements) prohibit
installation of other types of HVAC systems.
9.2.7	Set Point Reset Controls
Systems supplying heated or cooled air to multiple zones must include controls that automatically reset supply air
temperature, as required by building loads or by outdoor air temperature. Systems supplying heated and/or chilled
water to comfort conditioning systems must also include controls that automatically reset supply water
temperatures, as required by:
•	Changes in building loads.
9-10 Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	Outdoor air temperature.
•	Changes in return water temperature.
The BAS shall be configured to maintain compliance with the requirements for thermal comfort of occupants
contained in ASHRAE Standard 55.
Summer and winter space or zone humidity and temperature control shall be provided only on a space-by-space or
zone-by-zone basis, and not for the entire ventilation system (unless required to maintain specific humidity and
temperature conditions, as stated in the project requirements). The BAS can provide occupants with control over
their zone set points, but the range of set point adjustment should be limited to reduce the impact on feedback
systems. For certain systems (e.g., UFAD systems with adjustable controls at each workstation), users may be given
greater control of ventilation air delivery. The HVAC systems nighttime setback shall be controlled by a digital
timing algorithm. Areas that have excessive heat gain or heat loss, or those significantly affected by solar radiation
at different times of the day, shall be independently controlled.
The BAS shall also have the ability to accommodate occupancy control strategies, including:
•	Infrared or ultrasonic occupancy sensors to actuate lighting.
•	C02 sensors to actuate ventilation airflow.
In addition, an interface between the lighting occupancy sensors and the zone temperature set point can make a
significant contribution to energy efficiency and should be considered during design. In a temporarily unoccupied
zone, the temperature set point range can be broadened slightly to "float," subject to the nature of the work
performed in the space. The set point range would then be returned to the normal tolerance range when the zone
is reoccupied (as indicated by actuation of lighting).
Supply air fans on VAV systems are typically controlled to maintain static pressure in the duct system at a given set
point. For systems with DDC of individual zone boxes reporting to the BAS, the static pressure set point shall be
reset based on the zone requiring the most pressure (ASHRAE Standard 90.1).
9.3 Energy Management and Conservation
HVAC systems will be provided with automatic controls that will allow systems to be operated to conserve energy.
The following energy-saving controls shall be considered, if applicable to the system:
•	Enthalpy-controlled economizer cycle.
•	Controls to close outside air supply when the facility is unoccupied (non-laboratory areas only).
•	Night setback controls.
•	Outdoor temperature sensing unit that resets the supply hot water temperature in accordance with
outdoor ambient temperature. (The sensing unit shall automatically shut off the heating system and the
circulating pumps when the outdoor temperature reaches 65 ฐF, unless needed for research.)
•	Controls to shut off exhaust fans.
•	Reset controls for hot and cold decks or on air conditioning systems having hot and cold decks.
HVAC control algorithms shall include optimized start/stop for chillers, boilers, AHUs, and all associated equipment
and feed forward controls. The optimized start/stop mode, which is controlled based on predicted weather
conditions, aids in minimizing equipment run time without letting space conditions drift outside comfort set
points. It accomplishes this objective by internally calculating:
•	The earliest time that systems can be shut down prior to the end of occupancy hours.
•	The latest time that systems can start up in the morning.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems 9-11

-------
These data are then used to automatically establish the operating schedules for heating and cooling systems.
Weather prediction programs shall be provided with the BAS software; these programs store historic weather data
in the processor memory and use this information to anticipate peaks or part-load conditions. Economizer cycles
and heat recovery equipment shall also be controlled based on the weather prediction algorithms.
The BAS shall enable building staff to monitor instantaneous and time-based trends of operational parameters
(e.g., damper position, supply/return temperatures) and energy consumption. Data points related to energy
consumption are those points that are monitored to ensure compliance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1. Users shall
have the ability to view and trend data in the BAS from all connected equipment and systems (e.g., chillers, boilers,
AHUs, cooling towers, VAV boxes, pumps). Data shall be available as instantaneous measurements and
accumulated totals over a selected time period. Users shall be able to export data from the BAS into the standard
database and spreadsheet formats used by the EPA and transmit data to a designated workstation(s) or website.
Refer to Section 7.8, Energy and Water Metering, within these A&E Guidelines for additional information.
9.4	Building Alarm System
The BAS	shall handle building alarms for the following systems and equipment status:
•	Fire alarm initiation.
•	HVAC system motor alarms.
•	Emergency generator running.
•	Freezer and cold box temperature alarms.
•	UPS system failure.
•	Fume hood and biosafety cabinet alarms (critical low-flow).
•	Location of activated detection, extinguishing or manual alarm device.
•	Exhaust hood and ventilated cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow).
•	Exhaust systems for instrument and safety cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow).
•	Acid neutralization system alarms.
•	Power failure.
•	Incubator temperature alarm.
•	Gas alarm.
•	Sensor (gas) alarm.
•	Laboratory negative pressure failure alarm.
•	Sump overflow alarm.
•	Cooling tower overflow alarm.
•	Additional systems to be identified by the EPA on a case-by-case basis.
9.5	Maintenance Scheduling
The BAS shall include control programs that switch pumps and compressors from operating mode to standby mode
on a scheduled basis. In addition, programs that provide generic preventive maintenance schedules for building
systems and equipment shall be included, complete with information on which parts, tools and other resources are
required to perform the necessary preventive maintenance tasks. The systems shall be configured to allow easy
9-12 Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
calibration and recalibration of all sensors and actuators installed to measure and respond to the parameters listed
in Table 9-3 above.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems 9-13

-------
This page intentionally left blank.
9-14 Chapter 9. Building Automation Systems Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
10. Fire Protection
This chapter provides criteria for establishing minimum construction requirements at EPA-owned or leased
facilities.
Unless otherwise specified in these A&E Guidelines or approved by the EPA Real Property Services Staff and the
EPA Safety and Sustainability Division, the following shall apply:
•	Leased properties shall conform to the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), the
POR and the GSA lease. Property owners are responsible for keeping fire protection appurtenances,
signage and markings well maintained.
•	EPA-owned facilities shall conform to GSA PBS-P100, the IBC, and the International Fire Code (IFC), as well
as the design requirements in these A&E Guidelines. If the local fire department that provides emergency
services to the EPA-owned facility has any local amendments to its fire code, these requirements shall
also be met. It shall be the responsibility of the Project A/E to contact the local authority and incorporate
any code issues into the design documents.
•	Facilities on Department of Defense (DoD) installations may have additional requirements found in the
UFC.
10.1 Emergency Vehicle Access and Fire Lanes
The design for fire department access should consider vehicular circulation, pedestrian circulation, parking, and
any fire department apparatus and onsite fixed fire safety equipment (e.g., fire hydrants, fire loops, fire pumps,
post-indicator valves, automatic sprinkler and standpipe system connections).
For all new construction and alterations, fire department and emergency vehicle access shall be provided and
maintained in in accordance with NFPA 241, NFPA 1141, NFPA 1901, the IFC, and local codes, ordinances, and fire
department requirements. This includes, but is not limited to, requirements for access roadway surface material,
minimum width of fire lane(s), minimum turning radius for the largest fire department apparatus, weight of the
largest fire department apparatus and minimum vertical clearance of the largest fire department apparatus.
Where there is a conflict, the more stringent requirements apply.
The Project A/E and the EPA shall coordinate with the local fire marshal or other AHJ to meet all relevant
requirements of local fire code pertaining to emergency vehicle access. Access of emergency vehicles shall be
accounted for within the barrier system design and comply with Section 503 of the IFC and local codes.
Gates equipped with electrically controlled devices shall have an override key switch. All electrically controlled
gates shall also be provided with a manual override to allow operation of the gate during power outage, and shall
be designed to remain in the open position when left unattended. In addition, electrically operated gates shall be
equipped with a key switch that meets local code and the AHJ's requirements. Activation of the switch shall open
the gate(s) and cause them to remain in the open position until reset by emergency response personnel.
Bollards installed across entrances that emergency vehicles may use must be collapsible. Bollards shall be designed
to collapse when a steady bumper force is provided by an emergency vehicle or provided with a locking hinge
equipped with a Knox Box key lock or similar standardized locking arrangement. In addition, bollards shall be
equipped with a manual activation mechanism that can be operated using a standard fire hydrant wrench.
If an intercom system is used at site entrances, it shall allow for emergency response personnel to communicate
directly with the facility's Security or Fire Command Center.
EPA-owned properties shall have fire lane markings as follows:
•	Both the inner and outer edges of the fire lane shall be marked. Where curbs are present, the top and
face of the curb shall be painted red. Where no curbs are present, the edges of the fire lane shall be
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 10. Fire Protection 10-1

-------
marked with a 4- to 6-inch solid red demarcation line. Where the demarcation line of a fire lane intersects
an access roadway or parking lot aisle, the line across the intersection may be a solid or broken line.
•	The words "NO PARKING - FIRE LANE" or "FIRE LANE - NO PARKING" shall appear in 4-inch white letters
at 25-foot intervals on the red demarcation line along both sides of the fire lane. Where curbs are
present, the words shall be on the vertical face of the curb.
•	Roadways shall be marked with the words "FIRE" and "LANE." The markings shall be painted with the
word "FIRE" being closest to a driver approaching such marking. Each word shall be at least 10 feet high
and 20 feet wide. The distance between the word "FIRE" and the word "LANE" shall be no greater than
30 feet. The distance from the word "LANE" to the beginning of the second set of roadway markings
where the word "FIRE" begins shall be no greater than 100 feet.
•	Fire lane signs shall be spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals. All fire lane signs shall be located
between 6 to 8 feet above the pavement. Signs shall be placed at each end of the fire lane. Signs shall face
all oncoming traffic. Where no parking is provided between the building and the fire lane, signs shall be
posted along the inner curb, building line or edge of the roadway immediately adjacent to the fire lane.
10.2 Main Firefighting Water Supply
A dependable public or private water supply capable of supplying the required flow for firefighting shall be
provided for all EPA-owned and leased buildings. EPA-owned buildings shall be designed in accordance with the
following requirements.
All water mains supplying fire protection systems and fire hydrants shall be treated as fire mains and installed in
accordance with NFPA 24. Water mains shall have a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi. Water distribution
systems shall be designed to maintain normal operating pressures of 40 psi to 100 psi (at ground level) in mains
and building service lines. Where the gradient across the service area is such that multiple pressure zones are
necessary to maintain the normal operating pressures, pressure-reducing valves shall be used to separate each
pressure zone. Use of pressure relief and surge relief valves shall be considered, as necessary, to preclude system
damage from water hammer.
When domestic water distribution systems also supply firefighting water, the system shall be capable of:
•	Delivering a peak domestic flow of 2.5 times the average daily demand, plus any special demands, at a
minimum residual pressure of 20 psi at ground elevation (or higher-pressure residual pressure if special
conditions warrant).
•	Satisfying firefighting flow requirements plus 50 percent of the average domestic requirements, plus any
additional demands (e.g., process water, cooling water) that cannot be reduced during a fire.
- Where domestic water distribution systems must serve internal fire protection systems (i.e.,
sprinklers or foam systems), adequate residual pressures shall be maintained for proper operation of
these systems.
For buildings located in rural areas where established water supply systems for firefighting are not available, the
water supply shall be obtained from a tank, reservoir or other reliable source. Any variations from the above flow
requirements shall have written permission from the EPA.
10.2.1 Fire Hydrants
Except as noted below, every building shall be provided, at a minimum, with a water supply that is available for use
by fire department mobile pumping apparatus. The water supply shall normally be provided by fire hydrants
suitable for firefighting apparatus. The hydrants shall be supplied from a dependable public or private water main
system. Alternative water supplies must comply with NFPA 1142. Other water supplies shall be available to
buildings where fire protection requires them. Fire protection water does not have to meet drinking water
standards.
10-2 Chapter 10. Fire Protection Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Each fire hydrant within the distribution system must be capable of delivering 1,000 gallons per minute at a
minimum residual pressure of 20 psi. Fire hydrant branches (from main to hydrant) shall be not less than 6 inches
in diameter and no longer than 300 feet. A gate valve shall be installed within each fire hydrant branch to facilitate
maintenance. Fire hydrants shall be installed at maximum intervals of 400 feet and not be located more than
300 feet from the buildings to be protected. Each building shall be protected by at least two hydrants.
Fire hydrants must be between 3 to 7 feet from the roadway shoulder or curb line. Barrels must be long enough to
permit at least an 18-inch vertical clearance between the center of the 4.5-inch suction connection and the
finished grade. The grade shall be sloped so that any surface drainage flows away from the hydrant. The suction
connection shall be perpendicular to the street to allow for a straight-aligned connection to the pumper.
Fire hydrants shall be color-coded in accordance with NFPA 291, unless the local fire department has another
manner to distinguish the flow characteristics of the hydrants. The hydrant number and main size shall be
stenciled on the fire hydrant in contrasting color to the hydrant.
The water supply system shall provide ample water for each of the three types of fire protection water use:
outside fire department hose streams from hydrants; small and large hose streams from inside-building standpipe
or hose connections; and automatic sprinkler systems. The minimum requirements for each type of water use shall
not be cumulative or additive and are determined as described below.
10.2.2 Fire Department Hose Streams
The hose stream required shall be determined by using the needed fire flow calculation method outlined in
Section 300 of the Fire Suppression Rating Schedule of the Insurance Service Office and the local fire code
authority. Fire flow testing shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA 291 and shall be performed early in the
design stage. The water flow test shall be adjusted to account for diurnal fluctuations based on daily use and
seasonal supply, using hydraulic gradients, computer modeling or a predetermined pressure safety factor.
Based upon the available water flow, the size of the building or the construction materials proposed for the
building may be limited. The required fire flow shall be based on the fire areas of the building, not on the entire
area of the building. The fire flow for the fire area requiring the greatest water flow shall be the needed fire flow
for the building.
10.3 Types of Construction
Identification of construction classifications is required to meet both the local building code criteria and the criteria
of EPA, GSA and NFPA standards. The various types of construction are defined in NFPA 220 and the model
building codes. The construction classifications shall be indicated on design documents as applicable along with
any height and area calculations.
The type of construction of an EPA building shall be the one determined to be the most suitable and economical
for the occupancy classification and the height and area limitations dictated by the local building code. Height and
area, including the area of any floor in the building, shall not exceed the limits set forth in the local building code.
10.3.1	Ceilings
Suspended ceilings shall not be considered part of a fire-resistive assembly in any areas. Routine building O&M
requires periodic access to the space above the suspended ceiling. It has been the experience of the EPA that a
rated floor-ceiling assembly is not a design that can be reasonably maintained as a fire-resistive assembly over the
life of the building.
10.3.2	Mixed Occupancies
Mixed occupancies are areas in which two or more classes of occupancy coexist. As per the IBC and NFPA 101,
mixed occupancies can be either non-separated or separated. In non-separated uses, the means of egress,
construction, protection and other safeguards are based on the occupancy that demands the more stringent
requirements. Separated uses are divided from one another by means of fire separation including fire-retardant
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 10. Fire Protection 10-3

-------
walls, fire doors and other related openings, and fire-resistant floor and ceiling openings. Reference the IBC for
specific information on mixed uses. NFPA 101 requires separated occupancies to be equipped with separate means
of egress.
10.4	Classification of Occupancies
Buildings and spaces shall be classified by occupancy to determine separation requirements, types of construction
and other fire safeguards. The use of a building or structure determines its occupancy or use classification.
Methods of classification are presented in NFPA 101, other NFPA codes and standards that may apply to specific
situations, and local building and fire prevention codes. The basis of these classifications varies with each code or
standard. Some of the methods of classification are listed below.
•	NFPA 101 occupancy classification is based on the use of the building or area considered. Examples are
business, assembly and industrial occupancies.
•	Model building code use classification is based on the use of the building or area considered. Examples
are Use Group B (business), S-l (moderate hazard storage), and F (factory and industrial) as defined by the
IBC.
•	NFPA 13 hazard classification is based on the degree of fire hazard represented by the use of the building
or area to be protected by sprinklers. Examples are Light Hazard and Ordinary Hazard (Group 2).
•	NFPA 45 laboratory classification is based on the amount of flammable and combustible liquids and
liquefied flammable gases per floor area present in a laboratory unit. Examples are Class A, Class B and
Class C.
•	NFPA 230 construction classification is based on the type of materials stored and their burning
characteristics.
Further details regarding classification of occupancy can be found in the standards referenced above, as well as
from the IBC. Special design considerations are outlined in the GSA PBS-P100 for high severity occupancy in
accordance with the IBC.
Occupancy classifications shall be clearly identified in design documents, construction documents, as-built/record
drawings and specifications. Since occupancy classifications are specific to the respective codes and standards, all
relevant occupancy classifications shall be indicated. For example, a Class B laboratory as defined by NFPA 45 could
be either Use Group B (business) or H (high hazard) as defined by the IBC, and Industrial Occupancy as defined by
NFPA 101. The following list could represent the occupancy classifications for a single laboratory project.
•	NFPA 45—Class B Laboratory.
•	NFPA 101—Industrial.
•	IBC—Business.
•	NFPA 13—Ordinary Hazard (Group 2), or Extra Hazard (Group 1) if flammable compressed gases.
•	NFPA 10—Ordinary Hazard.
If the local building code is not based on the IBC, or there are conflicts between the local code and a model code,
the discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the EPA Project Manager for resolution.
10.5	Egress
The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms shall conform to
NFPA 101, the IBC, and/or local codes, whichever is most stringent. In addition to the aforementioned codes,
means of egress for laboratory facilities shall comply with the requirements set forth in NFPA 45. The facility,
buildings and interior modules shall have controllable access, which should ensure a reasonably safe and secure
working environment.
10-4 Chapter 10. Fire Protection Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
10.5.1	Lighted Exit Signs
Exit signs shall not contain tritium, the radioactive form of hydrogen. If the tubes in the exit signs are severely
damaged, the tritium can escape and enter the body through inhalation or an open wound, or be absorbed
through the skin. Personnel should not handle damaged exit signs.
10.5.2	Photoluminescent Materials
Exit Stair Identification Signs
The EPA has specific requirements in addition to NFPA 101 for exit stair identification. They are as follows:
•	Stair identification signs shall have a photoluminescent background complying with ASTM E2072,
Standard Specification for Photoluminescent (Phosphorescent) Safety Markings.
•	The signs shall be a minimum size of 18 inches by 12 inches.
•	The letters designating the identification of the stair enclosure shall be a minimum of 1.5 inches in height.
•	The number designating the floor level shall be a minimum of 5 inches in height and located in the center
of the sign.
•	All other lettering and numbers shall be a minimum of 1 inch in height.
•	The directional arrow shall be a minimum of 3 inches in length.
Exit Stair Treads
The EPA has specific requirements in addition to NFPA 101 for exit stair identification. They are as follows:
•	Stair treads shall incorporate a photoluminescent stripe that is either an applied coating, or a material
integral with, the full width of the horizontal leading edge of each stair tread, including the horizontal
leading edge of each landing nosing.
•	The width of the photoluminescent stripe shall be between 1 inch and 2 inches.
•	The width of the photoluminescent stripe, measured horizontally from the leading edge of the nosing,
shall be consistent at all nosings.
•	The photoluminescent materials used shall comply with ASTM E2072.
Exit Stair Handrails
The EPA has specific requirements in addition to NFPA 101 for exit stair handrails. They are as follows:
•	Stair handrails shall incorporate a photoluminescent marking that is either an applied coating, or a
material integral with, the entire length of each handrail.
•	The photoluminescent handrail marking, at a minimum, shall be located at the top surface of each
handrail, having a minimum width of 0.5 inches.
•	The photoluminescent handrail marking shall stop at the end of each handrail. If the handrail turns a
corner, the marking shall continue around the corner.
•	The photoluminescent materials used shall comply with ASTM E2072.
10.6 Coatings and Interior Finishes
10.6.1 Intumescent Coatings
Intumescent coatings shall not be used to increase the fire resistance rating of any component. Use of intumescent
coatings for specialized situations or applications must be approved by a Licensed Fire Protection Engineer and/or
the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division. Any intumescent coating utilized for special applications must be
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 10. Fire Protection 10-5

-------
approved or listed by a recognized testing laboratory. Coatings must be applied and maintained in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and the product listing.
10.6.2 Combustible Substances
Materials composed of basically combustible substances (e.g., wood, fiberboard) that have been treated with fire-
retardant chemicals throughout the material (e.g., pressure impregnation), as opposed to surface treatment, may
be used as interior finish subject to the following conditions:
•	The treated material shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
•	The treated material shall not be installed in any location where conditions exist that may reduce the
effectiveness of the fire-retardant treatment (e.g., high humidity).
•	The treated material is listed by UL or other nationally recognized testing laboratory.
Fire-retardant surface treatments may be used to reduce the risks associated with existing conditions, in
accordance with applicable codes. Materials that will result in flame spread or smoke development ratings higher
than those permitted in these A&E Guidelines shall not be used as an interior finish. Finishing materials shall
conform to flame spread and smoke developed criteria requirements as set forth in the most stringent of the
applicable codes.
10.7 Fire Life Safety Requirements for Specific Room Types
This section describes special, and often more stringent, fire life safety considerations that shall be followed for
specific room types.
10.7.1	Telecommunications Rooms
When communications equipment is essential to the continuity of operation of the building or is otherwise critical,
the communications room shall be protected by fire barrier walls. Communications installations shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 76.
10.7.2	Information Technology Equipment Rooms
Except as noted below or elsewhere in these A&E Guidelines, the provisions of NFPA 75 shall be followed for
electronic equipment rooms. The scope of NFPA 75 shall be used to determine applicability of this section.
•	Construction: All operations shall be housed in a building of fire-resistant or noncombustible construction
and shall be separated from other occupancies within the building by 1-hour fire-rated construction. All
materials used in construction shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development
rating of 450 or less (Class A rating per NFPA 101). Raised floors shall be of noncombustible construction.
Except for small supervisory offices directly related to the electronic equipment operations, no activity
shall be located within the fire-rated enclosure. Important and vital records that have not been duplicated
and stored at a different location shall be stored in a room with 2-hour fire-rated enclosure. Class 150
1-hour-or-better data storage equipment shall be provided only for vital data that have not been
duplicated and that are being stored within the electronic equipment operations area.
•	Ventilation: A separate air-conditioning system shall be provided for the electronic equipment operation
area. If the system serves other areas, dampers to protect against both smoke and fire shall be provided
for the duct work at every penetration of the electronic equipment area fire separation. No other ducts
shall pass though the electronic equipment areas.
•	Emergency Accessories: Emergency lights, alarms, strobe lights and all necessary appurtenances shall be
provided as required by NFPA 75. Smoke detectors shall be provided at ceilings and in raised floors and
for data storage areas, in accordance with NFPA 72.
10-6 Chapter 10. Fire Protection Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	Fire Suppression: Automatic wet-pipe sprinkler protection shall be provided throughout all laboratory
areas containing electronic equipment operations areas, including data storage areas, in accordance with
NFPA 13. No sprinkler piping shall penetrate the shell of the room(s). The use of concealed, sidewall
sprinklers shall be employed. Concealed, dry barrel, sidewall sprinklers are optimal to prevent accidental
striking of the sprinkler and will keep the wet pipe of the sprinkler main outside the perimeter of the
room(s). The sprinkler piping serving the room(s) may be valved separately, but valves shall be provided
with tamper switches connected to the building fire alarm system.
•	Electrical Switches: Emergency shutoff switches shall be provided at all exits from the electronic
equipment area. These switches will allow for the disconnection of all power to the electronic equipment
and air-conditioning systems. The same shutoff switch shall be connected to a sprinkler water flow device
so that the power to the computer room, including the air handlers, will be shut off automatically when
the sprinkler system operates. The water flow device used to disconnect power to the equipment shall be
equipped with a supervised bypass switch so that maintenance testing can be conducted without
disconnecting power to the computer room equipment.
10.7.3	Records Storage Facilities and Areas
Records storage facilities and areas shall comply with NFPA 232, Standard for the Protection of Records; the track
file requirements of GSA PBS-P100; and 36 CFR 1234.
10.7.4	Storage Cabinets for Flammable and Combustible Liquids
Cabinets for the storage of Class I, Class II, and Class IIIA liquids shall be provided in accordance with the design,
construction, and storage capacity requirements stated in NFPA 30. Venting of storage cabinets is not required for
fire protection purposes, but venting may be required to comply with local codes or authorities having jurisdiction.
If venting is not required but desired by the program, funding for this feature shall be supplied by the local
program. Non-vented cabinets shall be sealed with the bungs supplied with the cabinet or with bungs specified by
the manufacturer of the cabinet.
For EPA-owned buildings, closers on cabinet doors shall meet GSA PBS P-100. Facilities on DoD installations shall
meet GSA PBS P-100 and the UFC; the most stringent criteria shall apply.
10.7.5	Storage Tanks for Compressed Gases and Cryogenic Liquids
Storage tanks for compressed gases and cryogenic liquids shall comply with NFPA 55.
10.8 Automatic Fire Suppression
10.8.1 Automatic Sprinkler Protection
Automatic sprinkler protection shall be provided in all new EPA-owned or leased facilities, as required by code. All
sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13. Facilities located on DoD
installations shall follow the UFC. All design documents, including the hydraulic calculations, must be maintained at
the building to facilitate future modifications of the sprinkler system.
Existing facilities shall be provided with sprinkler protection under the following circumstances:
•	In major modifications to existing laboratories that use chemicals, flammable liquids or explosive
materials.
•	Throughout all floors of any building where EPA occupancy is 75 feet high or higher. The height shall be
measured from the lowest point of fire department access to the floor level of the highest occupiable
story.
•	Throughout occupancies exceeding the area or height limitations allowed by the IBC.
•	In all areas below grade that meet the definition of "windowless" in the IBC.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 10. Fire Protection 10-7

-------
•	In all areas that contain a high-severity occupancy as defined by the GSA.
•	Throughout windowless buildings, windowless floors of buildings and windowless areas that exceed the
allowable limits of the IBC.
•	In cooling towers with more than 2,000 cubic feet of a combustible fill when the continued operation of
the cooling tower is essential to the operations in the area it services; the building is totally sprinkler
protected; a fire in the cooling tower could cause structural damage or other severe fire exposure to the
building; or the value of the cooling tower is five or more times the cost of installing the sprinkler
protection.
•	In any location where the maximum fire potential of the occupancy exceeds the fire-resistance
capabilities of exposed live-load-bearing structural elements (e.g., when a flammable-liquids operation is
moved into a former office area).
•	Throughout electronic equipment operation areas, including data storage areas.
Variances
If a variance is proposed to any of the requirements above to not include automatic sprinkler protection in an
existing or a new facility, a fire analysis shall be performed to demonstrate that the facility still meets applicable
codes. The provision of sprinkler protection (when not required by another code or standard) shall not be used as
a basis for reducing other levels of protection provided for that facility. However, where a code or standard allows
alternatives based on the provision of sprinklers, the alternatives allowed for sprinklered space may be applied.
Special protection systems supplement automatic sprinklers as described by the IBC and shall not be used as a
substitute for them, except where water is not available for sprinkler protection. As used in this document, a
Licensed Fire Protection Engineer shall have a valid Professional Engineering License in Fire Protection Engineering
and shall meet the requirements of the Society of Fire Protection Engineers Member Grade or equivalent.
In addition to the IBC requirements, atrium sprinkler systems shall be designed as a separate sprinkler zone. In
addition, a separate manual isolation valve and a separate water flow switch shall be located in an accessible
location. A tamper switch shall be provided on all such valves.
The minimum flow required to meet the needs of the automatic sprinkler system shall be determined by hydraulic
calculations, as required for sprinkler system designs. The water supply requirements shall include all sprinkler
flow and required hose stream allowances outlined in NFPA 13.
10.8.2	Water Supply Testing
Water flow testing shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA 291. In existing buildings outfitted with a fire
pump, the annual fire pump test performed by an independent contractor will suffice. All tests shall be witnessed
by a representative of the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division. The water flow test shall be adjusted to account
for diurnal fluctuations based on daily use and seasonal supply, using hydraulic gradients, computer modeling or a
predetermined pressure safety factor.
10.8.3	Size and Zoning
The sprinkler system main shall be sized to meet the required fire flow and pressure requirements. Fire pump(s)
shall be provided, if needed, and shall be installed in a separate room along with the sprinkler system main valves.
Sprinkler system water flow switch arrangement shall have the same boundaries as the fire alarm system fire
zones. Each sprinkler system protection zone shall be equipped with electrically supervised control valves and
water flow alarm systems connected to the fire alarm system.
10.8.4	Dry Pipe
In areas subject to freezing, install dry-pipe sprinkler systems, install minimum 12-inch barrel dry type sprinklers
with wet piping in heated space, provide heat in the space, and/or reroute the sprinkler piping. Heat tape shall not
10-8 Chapter 10. Fire Protection Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
be used on sprinkler piping. Where the unheated area is small, it may be cost-effective to install dry type
sprinklers. Antifreeze systems shall not be installed in any new construction or renovation projects.
10.8.5 Quick Response
Quick-response sprinklers must be used in new installations except where prohibited by NFPA 13 or GSA PBS-P100.
10.9 Fire Alarm Systems
Devices that activate fire alarm systems and evacuation alarms must be completely separated from other building
systems, such as environmental monitoring systems, BAS and security systems. Other features of the fire alarm
system (e.g., fan control or shutdown) may be shared with these other building systems, but the performance of
the fire alarm system must not be compromised and must meet the requirements stated in this subsection. In
general, auxiliary functions, such as elevator recall and smoke control, are not performed by the fire alarm system,
but by other mechanical or electrical systems.
The main fire alarm system shall supervise any auxiliary fire alarm control panel or sub-panel (e.g., computer room
smoke detection). Activation of the main fire alarm shall also activate the audible (and visual, if applicable) devices
of the auxiliary fire alarm control panel or sub-panel in the associated alarm area. The fire alarm system shall be in
compliance with the most recent codes and publications and:
•	GSA PBS-P100.
•	ABAAS.
•	EPA Safety Manual.
•	IBC.
•	IFC.
•	State and local codes.
A fire alarm control panel shall only serve one building. The fire alarm control panels may be interconnected on a
campus-wide arrangement, but an alarm shall sound only in the affected building. Continuity of business shall
prevail in the unaffected buildings. A graphic annunciator with light emitting diodes (LEDs) shall be located at the
main entrance to each building. Alphanumeric annunciators may be used only if an associated graphic layout with
LEDs is attached.
10.9.1 Automatic Systems Input
Supervisory signals shall be transmitted under each of the following conditions:
•	Operation or failure of generator.
•	Operation, failure or phase reversal of electric fire pump.
•	Loss of primary power to a fire alarm system, fire pump or extinguishing system.
•	Malfunctioning of the fire protection system battery back-up system.
•	Failure of one of the circuits/channels that carries the fire alarm signal to the remote, constantly manned
Central Monitoring Station.
•	Loss or too great of air pressure for dry-pipe sprinkler system.
•	Low water level in pressure tanks, elevated tanks or reservoirs.
•	When fire protection control valves are equipped with electronic monitoring devices, a supervisory signal
shall be transmitted when the hand wheel valve is turned no more than two complete revolutions or
there is 10 percent closure of the valve, whichever is less.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 10. Fire Protection 10-9

-------
10.9.2	Automatic Systems Output
All fire alarm activations shall immediately activate all indicating devices, initiate all emergency control functions
and transmit the alarm to the Central Monitoring Station. Pre-signal features and positive alarm sequence systems
are not acceptable.
•	All alarm signals or messages shall be continuous. Where public address systems are provided for the
facility, there shall be provisions for making announcements from the main fire alarm panel or from an
attended location where the fire alarm signal is received.
•	The output of special extinguishing systems, such as those provided for kitchens, shall include the
actuation of the building fire alarm system. Special detection systems shall indicate a supervisory signal at
the fire alarm panel.
•	For voice communications systems, only the occupants of the fire floor, the floor below and the floor
above are expected to relocate or evacuate. These occupants must automatically receive that message
and be notified of the emergency. Where automatic prerecorded voices are used, message arrangement
and content shall be designed to fit the needs of the individual building (e.g., bilingual messages where
appropriate).
•	The use of visual signals to supplement the audible fire alarm system shall be provided in accordance with
NFPA 72, the IBC and ABAAS.
•	Every alarm reported on a building fire alarm system shall automatically actuate one of the following:
-	A transmitter listed by UL, connected to a privately operated, central-station, protective signaling
system conforming to NFPA 72. The central-station facility shall be listed by UL; automatic telephone
dialers shall not be used.
-	An auxiliary tripping device connected to a municipal fire alarm box to notify the local fire
department, in accordance with NFPA 72.
-	A direct supervised circuit between a building and the local fire alarm headquarters or a constantly
manned fire station, in accordance with NFPA 72.
-	As a last resort, an alternate method approved by the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division.
Notification of the fire department shall occur no more than 90 seconds after the initiation of an alarm. The
specific location of the alarm may be determined by fire department personnel after they arrive.
10.9.3	System Features
All systems shall include the following:
•	Indication of normal or abnormal conditions.
•	Annunciation of alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions by zone.
•	Graphic annunciation of alarm conditions by zone.
•	Ring-back feature when a silence switch for audible trouble signal is provided.
High-Rise Systems Features
For high-rise buildings, the systems shall also include the following:
•	Permanent record of alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions via printer.
•	Initiation of an alert tone followed by a digitized voice message.
•	All power supply equipment and wiring shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70
and NFPA 72.
10-10 Chapter 10. Fire Protection Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
10.9.4	Reliability
In accordance with and as defined in NFPA 72, the Project A/E shall indicate, by class and style, the initiating
device, notification appliance and signaling line circuits, which shall define the circuit's capability to continue to
operate during specified fault conditions.
10.9.5	Central Station Service
The building(s) shall be protected by local fire alarm system(s) connected to either a fire department station or a
UL-listed central station service unit meeting the requirements of NFPA 72.
10.9.6	Fire Zones
Building(s) shall be subdivided into fire zones as recommended by the IBC; NFPA fire suppression, detection, and
alarm codes; and state codes. Fire alarm zones and sprinkler water flow switches shall be arranged to indicate the
same zones. Separate fire alarm and sprinkler zones create confusion. Properly designed sprinkler piping layouts
with strategically placed water flow switches create a cohesive overlapping of zones. Graphic annunciators shall be
provided at the main entrances and the security control center. These annunciators shall clearly show the outline
of the buildings, the fire zones, and the alarm-initiating devices. All signal devices shall be addressable (i.e., each
device shall have its own address, which shall report to monitoring devices in English for clear and quick
identification of the alarm source).
10.9.7	Wire Class and Circuit Survivability
The fire alarm system initiating device circuits shall be wired Class A, Style 7; alarm-indicating circuits (visual and
audible) shall be wired Class A (NFPA 72). In addition, the fire alarm system wiring shall meet the requirements of
GSA PBS-P100 for fire alarm survivability:
•	Two vertical risers (i.e., supply and return interconnected network circuits Style 7-Class A) shall be
installed as remote as practicable from each other so that a single fire will not involve both risers.
•	The two vertical risers shall be protected by a minimum 2-hour rated enclosure or an approved 2-hour
rated cable or system, not common to both vertical risers.
•	The horizontal interconnection between the two vertical risers at the top and bottom shall be protected
by a minimum 2-hour rated enclosure, or an approved 2-hour cable or system, or an approved
construction material having a 2-hour fire resistance rating.
•	A minimum of two distinct fire alarm audible notification appliance circuits and a minimum of two distinct
visible notification appliance circuits shall be provided on each floor.
•	Adjacent fire alarm audible and visible notification appliances shall be on separate circuits.
10.9.8	Emergency Power
Emergency power must be able to operate the fire alarm system in the supervisory mode for 48 hours, and to
operate all alarm devices and system output signals for at least 90 minutes.
10.9.9	Carbon Monoxide Detectors
Carbon monoxide detectors and detection systems shall be allowed to be transmitted to the fire alarm system as a
supervisory signal. Carbon monoxide detectors and detection systems shall be installed and maintained per
NFPA 72.
10.9.10	Fire Command Center
Where required by the IBC, state or local codes, or NFPA 101, the building must have a fire command center where
fire-related control panels are located. The fire command center must be located next to the main entrance and
shall be separated from the rest of the building by 1-hour fire-resistive construction. If the command center cannot
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 10. Fire Protection 10-11

-------
practically be located at the main entrance, coordinate its location with the local fire department and the EPA
Safety and Sustainability Division. Fire command centers shall comply with the applicable requirements of NFPA 1
and the IBC. Fire command center layout, size, and all features provided shall be submitted to the EPA Safety and
Sustainability Division and the local fire department for approval prior to construction of the center. Features
provided in the command center shall be as required by NFPA 1 and the IBC.
10.10	Portable Fire Extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers containing carbon tetrachloride or halon (chlorobromomethane) extinguishing agents
shall not be used. As per the requirements of GSA PBS-P100, portable fire extinguishers and cabinets shall not be
installed in common areas, general office or court space when the building is protected throughout with quick
response sprinklers. Additionally, in office buildings protected throughout with quick response sprinklers, fire
extinguishers shall only be installed in areas such as mechanical and elevator equipment areas, computer rooms,
uninterruptible power supply rooms, generator rooms, and special hazard areas.
Fire Extinguisher Locations
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in every laboratory room. It is good practice to also locate a fire
extinguisher in the corridor outside the laboratory in addition to those located within the laboratory. In the other
areas of the building or in non-laboratory buildings, the minimum number of fire extinguishers needed for
protection shall be determined in accordance with NFPA 10.
10.11	Gaseous Fire Suppression Systems
10.11.1	Halon-1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Fire protection systems that contain Halon-1301 (CF3Br, a halogenated hydrocarbon) shall not be installed in new
EPA facilities. Existing systems that use Halon-1301 shall be removed from service in accordance with Title VI of the
1990 CAA Amendments. The hardware may be left in place in anticipation of an environmentally acceptable
replacement. This policy applies to both fixed and portable systems. The halon recovered from systems shall be
made available through the Halon Recycling Corporation (1-800-258-1283).
Refer to the EPA Environmental Management Manual for information on removal of halon systems from EPA-
owned or leased facilities. Refer also to the list of acceptable halon substitutes approved under the EPA's SNAP
program.
10.11.2	Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishing Systems
While carbon dioxide systems are allowed in normally occupied spaces, it is recommended that their use as a total
flooding agent be limited to areas that are usually not occupied. Any carbon dioxide automatic extinguishing
system that is to be used in usually occupied spaces must be reviewed and approved by the EPA Real Property
Services Staff and the EPA Safety and Sustainability Division, and must meet the design requirements of NFPA 12
and 29 CFR 1910.162(b)(5).
10.12	Kitchen Exhaust Hoods
Kitchen exhaust ductwork systems shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with NFPA 96 and the
International Mechanical Code. Where differences are found, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
10.13	Operations and Maintenance Documents
O&M instructions and system layouts shall be posted at the control equipment or kept on file in the building
maintenance engineers' office. All personnel who may be expected to inspect, test, maintain or operate fire
protection apparatus shall be thoroughly trained in the functions they are expected to perform.
In addition to meeting the code requirements mentioned in the above subsections, the design shall be approved
by the local authority having jurisdiction over the project.
10-12 Chapter 10. Fire Protection Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
11. Specialties
11.1	Furnishings
The EPA follows the Environmentally Preferable Purchasing Program and Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines.
Furnishings shall be environmentally assessed based on the materials origin, recycled content, manufacturing
process and emissions. Wherever possible, refurbished or remanufactured furniture is recommended.
Furnishings are discussed more extensively in Volume 1 of the EPA Facilities Manual, Space Planning and
Acquisition Guidelines. Additional information on environmentally preferred specifications for furniture can be
obtained from the EPA Sustainable and Transportation Solutions Branch.
11.2	Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory
Interior signage systems and building directories must comply with ABAAS and OSHA standards, including 29 CFR
1910.145, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.
11.2.1	Door Identification
Door identification shall be installed in approved locations and must comply with ABAAS Section 703. Restroom,
stairway and corridor doors must be identified by the international symbol of accessibility at a height of 54 to
66 inches above the floor. Wherever possible, such identification should be mounted on the wall at the latch side
of the door. Seldom-used doors to areas posing danger to the blind must have knurled or acceptable plastic
abrasive-coated handles. Tactile warning indicators shall not be used to identify exit stairs. Each exit sign must be
illuminated to a surface value of at least 5 footcandles by a reliable light source and be distinctive in color. Each
exit sign must have the word "Exit" in plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches high, with the principal strokes of
the letters in the word "Exit" not less than 0.75 inches wide.
11.2.2	Room Numbering
A room-numbering and room-naming system is required for the identification of all spaces in the facility. Signage
plans shall be submitted to the EPA Project Manager for review and approval before signs are made.
11.2.3	Building Directory
The Project A/E shall propose the building directory type, style and format as part of the building design and
submit those items to the EPA Project Manager for review and approval.
11.3	Laboratory Casework
Preferably, all laboratory casework and associated fume hoods required in the facility shall be the product of one
manufacturer and shall be installed under the direction of that manufacturer. The laboratory casework design shall
meet the functional, aesthetic, adaptable, and maintenance needs of the scientists and technicians who will be
using the labs. Performance set forth herein shall establish minimum standards for design, performance and
function. Products that fail to meet these standards will not be considered.
Unless otherwise noted, all surfaces shall be of stainless steel or another nonporous, durable, corrosion-resistant
material. For rooms that do not require casework of metal construction, the casework materials shall be wood or
approved plastic. Wood casework shall be from certified sustainable forests or recycled material. Hardware used
for wood or plastic casework shall be epoxy coated. Plastic laminate or other similar facing materials, over wood or
composite material, are permitted only when the laminate or surfacing material is certified by the manufacturer to
be impervious to acids and other common laboratory solvents.
The laboratory casework that is subject to the above requirements shall have components, configuration,
materials, finish, and performance (including performance on chemical and physical performance tests)
comparable to cantilevered frame (C-frame) casework systems manufactured by Hamilton Industries and
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Chapter 11. Specialties 11-1

-------
Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation. Equipment manufactured by others is acceptable if the products are
of equal performance and have similar appearance and construction, but only after approval by the contracting
officer.
11.3.1	Shelving
Reagent shelves shall be 1-inch thick plywood, faced on both sides with acid-resistant plastic laminate, with all
exposed edges edge-banded in 3-millimeter (0.125-inch) thick PVC or similar performing material.
Adjustable shelving shall be 16-gauge steel shelving with hat-section reinforcing and shall be interchangeable with
wall-hung cabinets. Shelving standards shall be double-slotted, 30 inches in length and mounted at a height of
54 inches above the finished floor (measured to the bottom of the standard). Brackets shall be 16-gauge metal
with three blade hooks and shall be screwed to each shelf.
Storage shelving for chemicals shall be fitted with a raised lip or tilted slightly backward so containers will not slip
off the edge. Storage shelving for chemicals shall not be mounted significantly higher than eye level, to forestall
the risk of an employee upending a container and being showered with a hazardous chemical.
11.3.2	Vented Storage Cabinets
Vented acid/base storage cabinets shall be 3-foot wide metal cabinets. The inner surfaces of the cabinet shall be
factory-coated to resist acid/base fumes and spills. One adjustable shelf shall be provided.
11.3.3	Countertops
Countertop materials will vary depending on the intended use. The Project A/E shall be responsible for evaluating
the requirements of the laboratories to determine what countertop material is most suitable for each specific
application. The Project A/E shall submit the proposed material(s) to the EPA Project Manager for review and
approval. The material used for countertops shall also be used for back-splashes, side-splashes and services ledge
covers. Countertops adjacent to sinks shall have grooved drain boards. Casework along walls shall have a 4-inch
high backsplash. Countertops that are bio-based or have recycled content should be used, whenever possible.
Chemical-resistant plastic laminate countertops may be used in applications where extremely corrosive chemicals
or large quantities of water are not expected to be used. Epoxy resin (water-based) countertops shall be used in
laboratories or in areas where extremely corrosive chemicals or large quantities of water are being used on a
routine basis. All joints shall be bonded with a highly chemical-resistant and corrosion-resistant cement having
properties similar to those of the base material. Stainless steel countertops shall be used in special applications
where sterile conditions are required (e.g., glassware washing areas, autoclave rooms), where there are controlled
environmental temperatures (e.g., cold rooms, growth chambers), and where radioisotopes are being used.
11-2 Chapter 11. Specialties Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Appendix A: Relevant Codes and Standards
As stated in Section 1.1, Overview, of these A&E Guidelines, this appendix includes a list of required regulations,
codes, standards, references and guidance. This list is not all-inclusive, however, and omission from this list does
not release the Project A/E or Construction Contractor from meeting established applicable regulations, codes,
standards, references and guidance.
Citations of regulations, codes, standards, references and guidance within these A&E Guidelines shall be assumed
to refer to the most recent edition at the time of contract award. Any publication dates specifically stated in the
A&E Guidelines reflect the version in use when the A&E Guidelines were written and published. When using these
A&E Guidelines, the user shall verify that the documents referenced are the most recent and have not been
superseded. In cases of conflict between codes, standards or other requirements, the most stringent, technically
appropriate criteria shall apply. Where it is unclear which set of requirements is applicable, consult the EPA Project
Manager for direction.
A.l Required Regulations, Codes, Standards and References
•	American National Standards Institute/American Industrial Hygiene Association/American Society of
Safety Engineers:
—	Z9.2, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Ventilation Systems.
—	Z9.5, American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation.
•	American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
—	B31.1, Power Piping.
—	B31.3, Process Piping.
—	B31.9, Building Services Piping.
•	American National Standards Institute/American Society of Safety Engineers:
—	Z9.ll, Laboratory Decommissioning.
—	Z9.14, Testing and Performance-Verification Methodologies for Ventilation Systems for Biosafety Level
3 (BSL-3) and Animal Biosafety Level 3 (ABSL-3) Facilities.
•	American National Standards Institute/Building Owners and Managers Association Z65.1, Office Buildings:
Standard Methods of Measurement.
•	American National Standards Institute/International Safety Equipment Association Z358.1, American
National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.
•	American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute 41, Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing
Buildings.
•	American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
—	Standard 55, Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy.
—	Standard 62.1, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
—	Standard 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
—	Standard 189.1, Standard for the Design of High-Performance Green Buildings (select requirements as
identified in these A&E Guidelines).
•	Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Standard.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Appendix A: Relevant Codes and Standards A-l

-------
•	Centers for Disease Control and Prevention/National Institutes of Health Biosafety in Microbiological and
Biomedical Laboratories.
•	Clean Air Act.
•	Clean Water Act.
•	Code of Federal Regulations.
•	Community Environmental Response Facilitation Act.
•	Council on Environmental Quality/Advisory Council on Historic Preservation NEPA and NHPA: A Handbook
for Integrating NEPA and Section 106.
•	Department of Homeland Security Interagency Security Committee The Risk Management Process for
Federal Facilities.
•	Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007.
•	Energy Policy Acts of 1992 and 2005.
•	Environmental Protection Agency:
-	EPA Building Commissioning Guidelines.
-	EPA Performance Requirements for Laboratory Fume Hoods.
-	Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under
Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act.
•	Federal Management Regulation.
•	Federal Property and Administrative Services Act.
•	General Services Administration PBS-P100, Facilities Standards for the Public Buildings Service (select
requirements as identified in these A&E Guidelines).
•	Guidance for Federal Agencies on Sustainable Practices for Designed Landscapes and its addendum,
Supporting the Health of Honey Bees and Other Pollinators.
•	Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals.
•	Guiding Principles for Sustainable Federal Buildings.
•	International Building Code.
•	International Energy Conservation Code.
•	International Fire Code.
•	International Mechanical Code.
•	International Plumbing Code.
•	National Air Duct Cleaners Association Assessment, Cleaning, and Restoration ofHVACSystems.
•	National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program Recommended Seismic Provisions for New Buildings and
Other Structures.
•	National Fire Protection Association:
-	1, Fire Code, and its mandatory referenced codes and standards.
-	101, Life Safety Code, and its mandatory referenced codes and standards.
A-2 Appendix A: Relevant Codes and Standards Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	National Historic Preservation Act.
•	National Institutes of Health:
-	Design Requirements Manual (as applicable, for Biosafety Level 3 facilities).
-	Public Health Service Policy on Humane Care and Use of Laboratory Animals.
•	National Institutes of Standards and Technology:
-	Handbook 135, Life Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management Program.
-	Standards of Seismic Safety for Existing Federally Owned and Leased Buildings: ICSSC Recommended
Practice 8.
•	National Primary Drinking Water Regulations.
•	Office of Management and Budget Circular A-94.
•	Resource Conservation and Recovery Act.
•	Safe Drinking Water Act.
•	Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance:
-	568 Set, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Set.
-	569, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
-	607, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises.
A.2	Additional Guidance
The following organizations and agencies provide guidance documents that shall be followed as applicable:
•	Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute.
•	Air Movement and Control Association.
•	American Concrete Institute.
•	American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.
•	American Industrial Hygiene Association.
•	American Institute of Architects.
•	American Institute of Steel Construction.
•	American Land Title Association.
•	American National Standards Institute.
•	American Petroleum Institute.
•	American Society of Civil Engineers.
•	American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
•	American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
•	American Society of Plumbing Engineers.
•	American Society of Safety Engineers.
•	American Society of Sanitary Engineering.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Appendix A: Relevant Codes and Standards A-3

-------
•	American Veterinary Medical Association.
•	American Water Works Association.
•	American Welding Society.
•	Associated Air Balance Council.
•	Association for Assessment and Accreditation of Laboratory Animal Care.
•	ASTM International.
•	Building Owners and Managers Association.
•	Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.
•	Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association.
•	Collaborative Technology Innovation and Video Services Group.
•	Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
•	Construction Specifications Institute.
•	Cooling Technology Institute.
•	Department of Defense.
•	Department of Energy.
•	Department of Health and Human Services.
•	Department of Homeland Security.
•	Department of Transportation.
•	Electronic Industries Association.
•	Environmental Protection Agency.
•	Federal Aviation Administration.
•	Federal Communication Commission.
•	Food and Drug Administration.
•	General Services Administration.
•	Illuminating Engineering Society.
•	Institute for Laboratory Animal Research.
•	Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
•	International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.
•	International Code Council.
•	International Electrical Testing Association.
•	International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation.
•	International Organization for Standardization.
•	Lightning Protection Institute.
A-4 Appendix A: Relevant Codes and Standards Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
•	Midwest Insulation Contractors Association.
•	National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
•	National Electrical Testing Association.
•	National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
•	National Fire Protection Association.
•	National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
•	National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
•	National Institutes of Health.
- Office of Laboratory Animal Welfare.
•	National Institutes of Standards and Technology.
•	National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.
•	National Science Foundation.
•	National Society of Professional Surveyors.
•	NSF International.
•	Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
•	Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
•	Plumbing and Drainage Institute.
•	Post Tensioning Institute.
•	Scientific Apparatus Makers Association.
•	Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
•	Society of Fire Protection Engineers.
•	Structural Engineering Institute.
•	Telecommunications Industries Association.
•	Underwriters Laboratories.
•	World Health Organization.
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines Appendix A: Relevant Codes and Standards A-5

-------